2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
#
|
Licenses: introduce SPDX Unique Lincense Identifiers
Like many other projects, U-Boot has a tradition of including big
blocks of License headers in all files. This not only blows up the
source code with mostly redundant information, but also makes it very
difficult to generate License Clearing Reports. An additional problem
is that even the same lincenses are referred to by a number of
slightly varying text blocks (full, abbreviated, different
indentation, line wrapping and/or white space, with obsolete address
information, ...) which makes automatic processing a nightmare.
To make this easier, such license headers in the source files will be
replaced with a single line reference to Unique Lincense Identifiers
as defined by the Linux Foundation's SPDX project [1]. For example,
in a source file the full "GPL v2.0 or later" header text will be
replaced by a single line:
SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
We use the SPDX Unique Lincense Identifiers here; these are available
at [2].
Note: From the legal point of view, this patch is supposed to be only
a change to the textual representation of the license information,
but in no way any change to the actual license terms. With this patch
applied, all files will still be licensed under the same terms they
were before.
Note 2: The apparent difference between the old "COPYING" and the new
"Licenses/gpl-2.0.txt" only results from switching to the upstream
version of the license which is differently formatted; there are not
any actual changes to the content.
Note 3: There are some recurring questions about linense issues, such
as:
- Is a "All Rights Reserved" clause a problem in GPL code?
- Are files without any license header a problem?
- Do we need license headers at all?
The following excerpt from an e-mail by Daniel B. Ravicher should help
with these:
| Message-ID: <4ADF8CAA.5030808@softwarefreedom.org>
| Date: Wed, 21 Oct 2009 18:35:22 -0400
| From: "Daniel B. Ravicher" <ravicher@softwarefreedom.org>
| To: Wolfgang Denk <wd@denx.de>
| Subject: Re: GPL and license cleanup questions
|
| Mr. Denk,
|
| Wolfgang Denk wrote:
| > - There are a number of files which do not include any specific
| > license information at all. Is it correct to assume that these files
| > are automatically covered by the "GPL v2 or later" clause as
| > specified by the COPYING file in the top level directory of the
| > U-Boot source tree?
|
| That is a very fact specific analysis and could be different across the
| various files. However, if the contributor could reasonably be expected
| to have known that the project was licensed GPLv2 or later at the time
| she made her contribution, then a reasonably implication is that she
| consented to her contributions being distributed under those terms.
|
| > - Do such files need any clean up, for example should we add GPL
| > headers to them, or is this not needed?
|
| If the project as a whole is licensed under clear terms, you need not
| identify those same terms in each file, although there is no harm in
| doing so.
|
| > - There are other files, which include both a GPL license header
| > _plus_ some copyright note with an "All Rights Reserved" clause. It
| > has been my understanding that this is a conflict, and me must ask
| > the copyright holders to remove such "All Rights Reserved" clauses.
| > But then, some people claim that "All Rights Reserved" is a no-op
| > nowadays. License checking tools (like OSLC) seem to indicate this is
| > a problem, but then we see quite a lot of "All rights reserved" in
| > BSD-licensed files in gcc and glibc. So what is the correct way to
| > deal with such files?
|
| It is not a conflict to grant a license and also reserve all rights, as
| implicit in that language is that you are reserving all "other" rights
| not granted in the license. Thus, a file with "Licensed under GPL, All
| Rights Reserved" would mean that it is licensed under the GPL, but no
| other rights are given to copy, modify or redistribute it.
|
| Warm regards,
| --Dan
|
| Daniel B. Ravicher, Legal Director
| Software Freedom Law Center (SFLC) and Moglen Ravicher LLC
| 1995 Broadway, 17th Fl., New York, NY 10023
| (212) 461-1902 direct (212) 580-0800 main (212) 580-0898 fax
| ravicher@softwarefreedom.org www.softwarefreedom.org
[1] http://spdx.org/
[2] http://spdx.org/licenses/
Signed-off-by: Wolfgang Denk <wd@denx.de>
2013-06-21 08:22:36 +00:00
|
|
|
# (C) Copyright 2000 - 2013
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
# Wolfgang Denk, DENX Software Engineering, wd@denx.de.
|
|
|
|
#
|
Licenses: introduce SPDX Unique Lincense Identifiers
Like many other projects, U-Boot has a tradition of including big
blocks of License headers in all files. This not only blows up the
source code with mostly redundant information, but also makes it very
difficult to generate License Clearing Reports. An additional problem
is that even the same lincenses are referred to by a number of
slightly varying text blocks (full, abbreviated, different
indentation, line wrapping and/or white space, with obsolete address
information, ...) which makes automatic processing a nightmare.
To make this easier, such license headers in the source files will be
replaced with a single line reference to Unique Lincense Identifiers
as defined by the Linux Foundation's SPDX project [1]. For example,
in a source file the full "GPL v2.0 or later" header text will be
replaced by a single line:
SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
We use the SPDX Unique Lincense Identifiers here; these are available
at [2].
Note: From the legal point of view, this patch is supposed to be only
a change to the textual representation of the license information,
but in no way any change to the actual license terms. With this patch
applied, all files will still be licensed under the same terms they
were before.
Note 2: The apparent difference between the old "COPYING" and the new
"Licenses/gpl-2.0.txt" only results from switching to the upstream
version of the license which is differently formatted; there are not
any actual changes to the content.
Note 3: There are some recurring questions about linense issues, such
as:
- Is a "All Rights Reserved" clause a problem in GPL code?
- Are files without any license header a problem?
- Do we need license headers at all?
The following excerpt from an e-mail by Daniel B. Ravicher should help
with these:
| Message-ID: <4ADF8CAA.5030808@softwarefreedom.org>
| Date: Wed, 21 Oct 2009 18:35:22 -0400
| From: "Daniel B. Ravicher" <ravicher@softwarefreedom.org>
| To: Wolfgang Denk <wd@denx.de>
| Subject: Re: GPL and license cleanup questions
|
| Mr. Denk,
|
| Wolfgang Denk wrote:
| > - There are a number of files which do not include any specific
| > license information at all. Is it correct to assume that these files
| > are automatically covered by the "GPL v2 or later" clause as
| > specified by the COPYING file in the top level directory of the
| > U-Boot source tree?
|
| That is a very fact specific analysis and could be different across the
| various files. However, if the contributor could reasonably be expected
| to have known that the project was licensed GPLv2 or later at the time
| she made her contribution, then a reasonably implication is that she
| consented to her contributions being distributed under those terms.
|
| > - Do such files need any clean up, for example should we add GPL
| > headers to them, or is this not needed?
|
| If the project as a whole is licensed under clear terms, you need not
| identify those same terms in each file, although there is no harm in
| doing so.
|
| > - There are other files, which include both a GPL license header
| > _plus_ some copyright note with an "All Rights Reserved" clause. It
| > has been my understanding that this is a conflict, and me must ask
| > the copyright holders to remove such "All Rights Reserved" clauses.
| > But then, some people claim that "All Rights Reserved" is a no-op
| > nowadays. License checking tools (like OSLC) seem to indicate this is
| > a problem, but then we see quite a lot of "All rights reserved" in
| > BSD-licensed files in gcc and glibc. So what is the correct way to
| > deal with such files?
|
| It is not a conflict to grant a license and also reserve all rights, as
| implicit in that language is that you are reserving all "other" rights
| not granted in the license. Thus, a file with "Licensed under GPL, All
| Rights Reserved" would mean that it is licensed under the GPL, but no
| other rights are given to copy, modify or redistribute it.
|
| Warm regards,
| --Dan
|
| Daniel B. Ravicher, Legal Director
| Software Freedom Law Center (SFLC) and Moglen Ravicher LLC
| 1995 Broadway, 17th Fl., New York, NY 10023
| (212) 461-1902 direct (212) 580-0800 main (212) 580-0898 fax
| ravicher@softwarefreedom.org www.softwarefreedom.org
[1] http://spdx.org/
[2] http://spdx.org/licenses/
Signed-off-by: Wolfgang Denk <wd@denx.de>
2013-06-21 08:22:36 +00:00
|
|
|
# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
#
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Summary:
|
|
|
|
========
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00:00
|
|
|
This directory contains the source code for U-Boot, a boot loader for
|
2004-10-17 21:12:06 +00:00
|
|
|
Embedded boards based on PowerPC, ARM, MIPS and several other
|
|
|
|
processors, which can be installed in a boot ROM and used to
|
|
|
|
initialize and test the hardware or to download and run application
|
|
|
|
code.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The development of U-Boot is closely related to Linux: some parts of
|
2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00:00
|
|
|
the source code originate in the Linux source tree, we have some
|
|
|
|
header files in common, and special provision has been made to
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
support booting of Linux images.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some attention has been paid to make this software easily
|
|
|
|
configurable and extendable. For instance, all monitor commands are
|
|
|
|
implemented with the same call interface, so that it's very easy to
|
|
|
|
add new commands. Also, instead of permanently adding rarely used
|
|
|
|
code (for instance hardware test utilities) to the monitor, you can
|
|
|
|
load and run it dynamically.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Status:
|
|
|
|
=======
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In general, all boards for which a configuration option exists in the
|
2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00:00
|
|
|
Makefile have been tested to some extent and can be considered
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
"working". In fact, many of them are used in production systems.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00:00
|
|
|
In case of problems see the CHANGELOG and CREDITS files to find out
|
2013-09-11 13:52:51 +00:00
|
|
|
who contributed the specific port. The boards.cfg file lists board
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
maintainers.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-11-14 02:03:20 +00:00
|
|
|
Note: There is no CHANGELOG file in the actual U-Boot source tree;
|
|
|
|
it can be created dynamically from the Git log using:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
make CHANGELOG
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Where to get help:
|
|
|
|
==================
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00:00
|
|
|
In case you have questions about, problems with or contributions for
|
|
|
|
U-Boot you should send a message to the U-Boot mailing list at
|
2008-09-10 14:18:34 +00:00
|
|
|
<u-boot@lists.denx.de>. There is also an archive of previous traffic
|
|
|
|
on the mailing list - please search the archive before asking FAQ's.
|
|
|
|
Please see http://lists.denx.de/pipermail/u-boot and
|
|
|
|
http://dir.gmane.org/gmane.comp.boot-loaders.u-boot
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
Where to get source code:
|
|
|
|
=========================
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The U-Boot source code is maintained in the git repository at
|
|
|
|
git://www.denx.de/git/u-boot.git ; you can browse it online at
|
|
|
|
http://www.denx.de/cgi-bin/gitweb.cgi?p=u-boot.git;a=summary
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The "snapshot" links on this page allow you to download tarballs of
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
any version you might be interested in. Official releases are also
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
available for FTP download from the ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/
|
|
|
|
directory.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 17:13:33 +00:00
|
|
|
Pre-built (and tested) images are available from
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/images/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Where we come from:
|
|
|
|
===================
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- start from 8xxrom sources
|
2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00:00
|
|
|
- create PPCBoot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/ppcboot)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- clean up code
|
|
|
|
- make it easier to add custom boards
|
|
|
|
- make it possible to add other [PowerPC] CPUs
|
|
|
|
- extend functions, especially:
|
|
|
|
* Provide extended interface to Linux boot loader
|
|
|
|
* S-Record download
|
|
|
|
* network boot
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
* PCMCIA / CompactFlash / ATA disk / SCSI ... boot
|
2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00:00
|
|
|
- create ARMBoot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/armboot)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- add other CPU families (starting with ARM)
|
2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00:00
|
|
|
- create U-Boot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/u-boot)
|
2008-08-06 17:32:33 +00:00
|
|
|
- current project page: see http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot
|
2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Names and Spelling:
|
|
|
|
===================
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The "official" name of this project is "Das U-Boot". The spelling
|
|
|
|
"U-Boot" shall be used in all written text (documentation, comments
|
|
|
|
in source files etc.). Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is the README file for the U-Boot project.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File names etc. shall be based on the string "u-boot". Examples:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
include/asm-ppc/u-boot.h
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#include <asm/u-boot.h>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Variable names, preprocessor constants etc. shall be either based on
|
|
|
|
the string "u_boot" or on "U_BOOT". Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
U_BOOT_VERSION u_boot_logo
|
|
|
|
IH_OS_U_BOOT u_boot_hush_start
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2002-12-17 17:55:09 +00:00
|
|
|
Versioning:
|
|
|
|
===========
|
|
|
|
|
2010-09-28 06:06:25 +00:00
|
|
|
Starting with the release in October 2008, the names of the releases
|
|
|
|
were changed from numerical release numbers without deeper meaning
|
|
|
|
into a time stamp based numbering. Regular releases are identified by
|
|
|
|
names consisting of the calendar year and month of the release date.
|
|
|
|
Additional fields (if present) indicate release candidates or bug fix
|
|
|
|
releases in "stable" maintenance trees.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Examples:
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot v2009.11 - Release November 2009
|
2010-09-28 06:06:25 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot v2009.11.1 - Release 1 in version November 2009 stable tree
|
|
|
|
U-Boot v2010.09-rc1 - Release candiate 1 for September 2010 release
|
2002-12-17 17:55:09 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Directory Hierarchy:
|
|
|
|
====================
|
|
|
|
|
2010-04-13 03:28:21 +00:00
|
|
|
/arch Architecture specific files
|
2014-03-07 09:02:02 +00:00
|
|
|
/arc Files generic to ARC architecture
|
|
|
|
/cpu CPU specific files
|
|
|
|
/arc700 Files specific to ARC 700 CPUs
|
|
|
|
/lib Architecture specific library files
|
2010-04-13 03:28:21 +00:00
|
|
|
/arm Files generic to ARM architecture
|
|
|
|
/cpu CPU specific files
|
|
|
|
/arm720t Files specific to ARM 720 CPUs
|
|
|
|
/arm920t Files specific to ARM 920 CPUs
|
2011-07-18 09:41:08 +00:00
|
|
|
/at91 Files specific to Atmel AT91RM9200 CPU
|
2010-06-13 15:48:15 +00:00
|
|
|
/imx Files specific to Freescale MC9328 i.MX CPUs
|
|
|
|
/s3c24x0 Files specific to Samsung S3C24X0 CPUs
|
2010-04-13 03:28:21 +00:00
|
|
|
/arm926ejs Files specific to ARM 926 CPUs
|
|
|
|
/arm1136 Files specific to ARM 1136 CPUs
|
|
|
|
/pxa Files specific to Intel XScale PXA CPUs
|
|
|
|
/sa1100 Files specific to Intel StrongARM SA1100 CPUs
|
|
|
|
/lib Architecture specific library files
|
|
|
|
/avr32 Files generic to AVR32 architecture
|
|
|
|
/cpu CPU specific files
|
|
|
|
/lib Architecture specific library files
|
|
|
|
/blackfin Files generic to Analog Devices Blackfin architecture
|
|
|
|
/cpu CPU specific files
|
|
|
|
/lib Architecture specific library files
|
|
|
|
/m68k Files generic to m68k architecture
|
|
|
|
/cpu CPU specific files
|
|
|
|
/mcf52x2 Files specific to Freescale ColdFire MCF52x2 CPUs
|
|
|
|
/mcf5227x Files specific to Freescale ColdFire MCF5227x CPUs
|
|
|
|
/mcf532x Files specific to Freescale ColdFire MCF5329 CPUs
|
|
|
|
/mcf5445x Files specific to Freescale ColdFire MCF5445x CPUs
|
|
|
|
/mcf547x_8x Files specific to Freescale ColdFire MCF547x_8x CPUs
|
|
|
|
/lib Architecture specific library files
|
|
|
|
/microblaze Files generic to microblaze architecture
|
|
|
|
/cpu CPU specific files
|
|
|
|
/lib Architecture specific library files
|
|
|
|
/mips Files generic to MIPS architecture
|
|
|
|
/cpu CPU specific files
|
2011-07-27 11:22:39 +00:00
|
|
|
/mips32 Files specific to MIPS32 CPUs
|
2014-03-07 09:02:02 +00:00
|
|
|
/mips64 Files specific to MIPS64 CPUs
|
2010-04-13 03:28:21 +00:00
|
|
|
/lib Architecture specific library files
|
2011-10-19 20:41:11 +00:00
|
|
|
/nds32 Files generic to NDS32 architecture
|
|
|
|
/cpu CPU specific files
|
|
|
|
/n1213 Files specific to Andes Technology N1213 CPUs
|
|
|
|
/lib Architecture specific library files
|
2010-04-13 03:28:21 +00:00
|
|
|
/nios2 Files generic to Altera NIOS2 architecture
|
|
|
|
/cpu CPU specific files
|
|
|
|
/lib Architecture specific library files
|
2013-09-15 22:34:15 +00:00
|
|
|
/openrisc Files generic to OpenRISC architecture
|
|
|
|
/cpu CPU specific files
|
|
|
|
/lib Architecture specific library files
|
2010-04-15 14:07:28 +00:00
|
|
|
/powerpc Files generic to PowerPC architecture
|
2010-04-13 03:28:21 +00:00
|
|
|
/cpu CPU specific files
|
|
|
|
/74xx_7xx Files specific to Freescale MPC74xx and 7xx CPUs
|
|
|
|
/mpc5xx Files specific to Freescale MPC5xx CPUs
|
|
|
|
/mpc5xxx Files specific to Freescale MPC5xxx CPUs
|
|
|
|
/mpc8xx Files specific to Freescale MPC8xx CPUs
|
|
|
|
/mpc824x Files specific to Freescale MPC824x CPUs
|
|
|
|
/mpc8260 Files specific to Freescale MPC8260 CPUs
|
|
|
|
/mpc85xx Files specific to Freescale MPC85xx CPUs
|
|
|
|
/ppc4xx Files specific to AMCC PowerPC 4xx CPUs
|
|
|
|
/lib Architecture specific library files
|
|
|
|
/sh Files generic to SH architecture
|
|
|
|
/cpu CPU specific files
|
|
|
|
/sh2 Files specific to sh2 CPUs
|
|
|
|
/sh3 Files specific to sh3 CPUs
|
|
|
|
/sh4 Files specific to sh4 CPUs
|
|
|
|
/lib Architecture specific library files
|
|
|
|
/sparc Files generic to SPARC architecture
|
|
|
|
/cpu CPU specific files
|
|
|
|
/leon2 Files specific to Gaisler LEON2 SPARC CPU
|
|
|
|
/leon3 Files specific to Gaisler LEON3 SPARC CPU
|
|
|
|
/lib Architecture specific library files
|
2013-09-15 22:34:15 +00:00
|
|
|
/x86 Files generic to x86 architecture
|
|
|
|
/cpu CPU specific files
|
|
|
|
/lib Architecture specific library files
|
2010-04-13 03:28:21 +00:00
|
|
|
/api Machine/arch independent API for external apps
|
|
|
|
/board Board dependent files
|
|
|
|
/common Misc architecture independent functions
|
|
|
|
/disk Code for disk drive partition handling
|
|
|
|
/doc Documentation (don't expect too much)
|
|
|
|
/drivers Commonly used device drivers
|
2013-09-15 22:34:15 +00:00
|
|
|
/dts Contains Makefile for building internal U-Boot fdt.
|
2010-04-13 03:28:21 +00:00
|
|
|
/examples Example code for standalone applications, etc.
|
|
|
|
/fs Filesystem code (cramfs, ext2, jffs2, etc.)
|
|
|
|
/include Header Files
|
|
|
|
/lib Files generic to all architectures
|
|
|
|
/libfdt Library files to support flattened device trees
|
|
|
|
/lzma Library files to support LZMA decompression
|
|
|
|
/lzo Library files to support LZO decompression
|
|
|
|
/net Networking code
|
|
|
|
/post Power On Self Test
|
2013-09-15 22:34:15 +00:00
|
|
|
/spl Secondary Program Loader framework
|
2010-04-13 03:28:21 +00:00
|
|
|
/tools Tools to build S-Record or U-Boot images, etc.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Software Configuration:
|
|
|
|
=======================
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Configuration is usually done using C preprocessor defines; the
|
|
|
|
rationale behind that is to avoid dead code whenever possible.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
There are two classes of configuration variables:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Configuration _OPTIONS_:
|
|
|
|
These are selectable by the user and have names beginning with
|
|
|
|
"CONFIG_".
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Configuration _SETTINGS_:
|
|
|
|
These depend on the hardware etc. and should not be meddled with if
|
|
|
|
you don't know what you're doing; they have names beginning with
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
"CONFIG_SYS_".
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Later we will add a configuration tool - probably similar to or even
|
|
|
|
identical to what's used for the Linux kernel. Right now, we have to
|
|
|
|
do the configuration by hand, which means creating some symbolic
|
|
|
|
links and editing some configuration files. We use the TQM8xxL boards
|
|
|
|
as an example here.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Selection of Processor Architecture and Board Type:
|
|
|
|
---------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For all supported boards there are ready-to-use default
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
configurations available; just type "make <board_name>_defconfig".
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example: For a TQM823L module type:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
cd u-boot
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
make TQM823L_defconfig
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
For the Cogent platform, you need to specify the CPU type as well;
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
e.g. "make cogent_mpc8xx_defconfig". And also configure the cogent
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
directory according to the instructions in cogent/README.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2014-03-22 23:12:59 +00:00
|
|
|
Sandbox Environment:
|
|
|
|
--------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
U-Boot can be built natively to run on a Linux host using the 'sandbox'
|
|
|
|
board. This allows feature development which is not board- or architecture-
|
|
|
|
specific to be undertaken on a native platform. The sandbox is also used to
|
|
|
|
run some of U-Boot's tests.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-08-31 15:49:43 +00:00
|
|
|
See board/sandbox/README.sandbox for more details.
|
2014-03-22 23:12:59 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Configuration Options:
|
|
|
|
----------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Configuration depends on the combination of board and CPU type; all
|
|
|
|
such information is kept in a configuration file
|
|
|
|
"include/configs/<board_name>.h".
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example: For a TQM823L module, all configuration settings are in
|
|
|
|
"include/configs/TQM823L.h".
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-10 22:06:23 +00:00
|
|
|
Many of the options are named exactly as the corresponding Linux
|
|
|
|
kernel configuration options. The intention is to make it easier to
|
|
|
|
build a config tool - later.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
The following options need to be configured:
|
|
|
|
|
2007-08-10 18:28:25 +00:00
|
|
|
- CPU Type: Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_MPC85XX.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Board Type: Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_MPC8540ADS.
|
2006-10-24 12:42:37 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CPU Daughterboard Type: (if CONFIG_ATSTK1000 is defined)
|
2007-11-01 11:44:20 +00:00
|
|
|
Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_ATSTK1002
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CPU Module Type: (if CONFIG_COGENT is defined)
|
|
|
|
Define exactly one of
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMA286_60_OLD
|
|
|
|
--- FIXME --- not tested yet:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMA286_60, CONFIG_CMA286_21, CONFIG_CMA286_60P,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMA287_23, CONFIG_CMA287_50
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Motherboard Type: (if CONFIG_COGENT is defined)
|
|
|
|
Define exactly one of
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMA101, CONFIG_CMA102
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Motherboard I/O Modules: (if CONFIG_COGENT is defined)
|
|
|
|
Define one or more of
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMA302
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Motherboard Options: (if CONFIG_CMA101 or CONFIG_CMA102 are defined)
|
|
|
|
Define one or more of
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_LCD_HEARTBEAT - update a character position on
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
the LCD display every second with
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
a "rotator" |\-/|\-/
|
|
|
|
|
2011-02-09 12:36:58 +00:00
|
|
|
- Marvell Family Member
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_MVFS - define it if you want to enable
|
|
|
|
multiple fs option at one time
|
|
|
|
for marvell soc family
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- MPC824X Family Member (if CONFIG_MPC824X is defined)
|
2003-10-09 20:09:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Define exactly one of
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_MPC8240, CONFIG_MPC8245
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- 8xx CPU Options: (if using an MPC8xx CPU)
|
2004-09-28 17:59:53 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_8xx_GCLK_FREQ - deprecated: CPU clock if
|
|
|
|
get_gclk_freq() cannot work
|
2003-10-09 20:09:04 +00:00
|
|
|
e.g. if there is no 32KHz
|
|
|
|
reference PIT/RTC clock
|
2004-09-28 17:59:53 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_8xx_OSCLK - PLL input clock (either EXTCLK
|
|
|
|
or XTAL/EXTAL)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-09-28 17:59:53 +00:00
|
|
|
- 859/866/885 CPU options: (if using a MPC859 or MPC866 or MPC885 CPU):
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_8xx_CPUCLK_MIN
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_8xx_CPUCLK_MAX
|
2004-09-28 17:59:53 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_8xx_CPUCLK_DEFAULT
|
2004-01-31 20:06:54 +00:00
|
|
|
See doc/README.MPC866
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_MEASURE_CPUCLK
|
2004-01-31 20:06:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-02-06 23:19:44 +00:00
|
|
|
Define this to measure the actual CPU clock instead
|
|
|
|
of relying on the correctness of the configured
|
|
|
|
values. Mostly useful for board bringup to make sure
|
|
|
|
the PLL is locked at the intended frequency. Note
|
|
|
|
that this requires a (stable) reference clock (32 kHz
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
RTC clock or CONFIG_SYS_8XX_XIN)
|
2004-01-31 20:06:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2009-03-12 06:37:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_DELAYED_ICACHE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this option if you want to enable the
|
|
|
|
ICache only when Code runs from RAM.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-02-18 11:40:54 +00:00
|
|
|
- 85xx CPU Options:
|
2012-10-08 07:44:30 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_PPC64
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Specifies that the core is a 64-bit PowerPC implementation (implements
|
|
|
|
the "64" category of the Power ISA). This is necessary for ePAPR
|
|
|
|
compliance, among other possible reasons.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-02-18 11:40:54 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_TBCLK_DIV
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defines the core time base clock divider ratio compared to the
|
|
|
|
system clock. On most PQ3 devices this is 8, on newer QorIQ
|
|
|
|
devices it can be 16 or 32. The ratio varies from SoC to Soc.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-05-20 05:39:21 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PCIE_COMPAT
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defines the string to utilize when trying to match PCIe device
|
|
|
|
tree nodes for the given platform.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-04-29 23:56:13 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_PPC_E500_DEBUG_TLB
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enables a temporary TLB entry to be used during boot to work
|
|
|
|
around limitations in e500v1 and e500v2 external debugger
|
|
|
|
support. This reduces the portions of the boot code where
|
|
|
|
breakpoints and single stepping do not work. The value of this
|
|
|
|
symbol should be set to the TLB1 entry to be used for this
|
|
|
|
purpose.
|
|
|
|
|
powerpc/fsl-corenet: work around erratum A004510
Erratum A004510 says that under certain load conditions, modified
cache lines can be discarded, causing data corruption.
To work around this, several CCSR and DCSR register updates need to be
made in a careful manner, so that there is no other transaction in
corenet when the update is made.
The update is made from a locked cacheline, with a delay before to flush
any previous activity, and a delay after to flush the CCSR/DCSR update.
We can't use a readback because that would be another corenet
transaction, which is not allowed.
We lock the subsequent cacheline to prevent it from being fetched while
we're executing the previous cacheline. It is filled with nops so that a
branch doesn't cause us to fetch another cacheline.
Ordinarily we are running in a cache-inhibited mapping at this point, so
we temporarily change that. We make it guarded so that we should never
see a speculative load, and we never do an explicit load. Thus, only the
I-cache should ever fill from this mapping, and we flush/unlock it
afterward. Thus we should avoid problems from any potential cache
aliasing between inhibited and non-inhibited mappings.
NOTE that if PAMU is used with this patch, it will need to use a
dedicated LAW as described in the erratum. This is the responsibility
of the OS that sets up PAMU.
Signed-off-by: Scott Wood <scottwood@freescale.com>
Signed-off-by: Andy Fleming <afleming@freescale.com>
2012-08-14 10:14:53 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enables a workaround for erratum A004510. If set,
|
|
|
|
then CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV and
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CORENET_SNOOPVEC_COREONLY must be set.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV2 (optional)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defines one or two SoC revisions (low 8 bits of SVR)
|
|
|
|
for which the A004510 workaround should be applied.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The rest of SVR is either not relevant to the decision
|
|
|
|
of whether the erratum is present (e.g. p2040 versus
|
|
|
|
p2041) or is implied by the build target, which controls
|
|
|
|
whether CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510 is set.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See Freescale App Note 4493 for more information about
|
|
|
|
this erratum.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-16 07:57:44 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_A003399_NOR_WORKAROUND
|
|
|
|
Enables a workaround for IFC erratum A003399. It is only
|
|
|
|
requred during NOR boot.
|
|
|
|
|
powerpc/fsl-corenet: work around erratum A004510
Erratum A004510 says that under certain load conditions, modified
cache lines can be discarded, causing data corruption.
To work around this, several CCSR and DCSR register updates need to be
made in a careful manner, so that there is no other transaction in
corenet when the update is made.
The update is made from a locked cacheline, with a delay before to flush
any previous activity, and a delay after to flush the CCSR/DCSR update.
We can't use a readback because that would be another corenet
transaction, which is not allowed.
We lock the subsequent cacheline to prevent it from being fetched while
we're executing the previous cacheline. It is filled with nops so that a
branch doesn't cause us to fetch another cacheline.
Ordinarily we are running in a cache-inhibited mapping at this point, so
we temporarily change that. We make it guarded so that we should never
see a speculative load, and we never do an explicit load. Thus, only the
I-cache should ever fill from this mapping, and we flush/unlock it
afterward. Thus we should avoid problems from any potential cache
aliasing between inhibited and non-inhibited mappings.
NOTE that if PAMU is used with this patch, it will need to use a
dedicated LAW as described in the erratum. This is the responsibility
of the OS that sets up PAMU.
Signed-off-by: Scott Wood <scottwood@freescale.com>
Signed-off-by: Andy Fleming <afleming@freescale.com>
2012-08-14 10:14:53 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CORENET_SNOOPVEC_COREONLY
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is the value to write into CCSR offset 0x18600
|
|
|
|
according to the A004510 workaround.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-07-02 03:51:04 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_DDR_ADDR
|
|
|
|
This value denotes start offset of DDR memory which is
|
|
|
|
connected exclusively to the DSP cores.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-04 04:01:54 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_M2_RAM_ADDR
|
|
|
|
This value denotes start offset of M2 memory
|
|
|
|
which is directly connected to the DSP core.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-07-02 03:51:04 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_M3_RAM_ADDR
|
|
|
|
This value denotes start offset of M3 memory which is directly
|
|
|
|
connected to the DSP core.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-04 04:01:54 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT
|
|
|
|
This value denotes start offset of DSP CCSR space.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-12-17 08:55:52 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SINGLE_SOURCE_CLK
|
|
|
|
Single Source Clock is clocking mode present in some of FSL SoC's.
|
|
|
|
In this mode, a single differential clock is used to supply
|
|
|
|
clocks to the sysclock, ddrclock and usbclock.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-03-18 18:10:26 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_CPC_REINIT_F
|
|
|
|
This CONFIG is defined when the CPC is configured as SRAM at the
|
|
|
|
time of U-boot entry and is required to be re-initialized.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-04-17 07:33:46 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_DEEP_SLEEP
|
|
|
|
Inidcates this SoC supports deep sleep feature. If deep sleep is
|
|
|
|
supported, core will start to execute uboot when wakes up.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-04-02 02:57:56 +00:00
|
|
|
- Generic CPU options:
|
2014-05-03 00:28:04 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_GENERIC_GLOBAL_DATA
|
|
|
|
Defines global data is initialized in generic board board_init_f().
|
|
|
|
If this macro is defined, global data is created and cleared in
|
|
|
|
generic board board_init_f(). Without this macro, architecture/board
|
|
|
|
should initialize global data before calling board_init_f().
|
|
|
|
|
2012-04-02 02:57:56 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_BIG_ENDIAN, CONFIG_SYS_LITTLE_ENDIAN
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defines the endianess of the CPU. Implementation of those
|
|
|
|
values is arch specific.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-09-30 16:22:09 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR
|
|
|
|
Freescale DDR driver in use. This type of DDR controller is
|
|
|
|
found in mpc83xx, mpc85xx, mpc86xx as well as some ARM core
|
|
|
|
SoCs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_ADDR
|
|
|
|
Freescale DDR memory-mapped register base.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_EMU
|
|
|
|
Specify emulator support for DDR. Some DDR features such as
|
|
|
|
deskew training are not available.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN1
|
|
|
|
Freescale DDR1 controller.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN2
|
|
|
|
Freescale DDR2 controller.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN3
|
|
|
|
Freescale DDR3 controller.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-03-28 00:54:47 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN4
|
|
|
|
Freescale DDR4 controller.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-09-30 21:20:51 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_ARM_GEN3
|
|
|
|
Freescale DDR3 controller for ARM-based SoCs.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-09-30 16:22:09 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR1
|
|
|
|
Board config to use DDR1. It can be enabled for SoCs with
|
|
|
|
Freescale DDR1 or DDR2 controllers, depending on the board
|
|
|
|
implemetation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR2
|
|
|
|
Board config to use DDR2. It can be eanbeld for SoCs with
|
|
|
|
Freescale DDR2 or DDR3 controllers, depending on the board
|
|
|
|
implementation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR3
|
|
|
|
Board config to use DDR3. It can be enabled for SoCs with
|
2014-03-28 00:54:47 +00:00
|
|
|
Freescale DDR3 or DDR3L controllers.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR3L
|
|
|
|
Board config to use DDR3L. It can be enabled for SoCs with
|
|
|
|
DDR3L controllers.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR4
|
|
|
|
Board config to use DDR4. It can be enabled for SoCs with
|
|
|
|
DDR4 controllers.
|
2013-09-30 16:22:09 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-01-18 06:58:30 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_BE
|
|
|
|
Defines the IFC controller register space as Big Endian
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_LE
|
|
|
|
Defines the IFC controller register space as Little Endian
|
|
|
|
|
2014-01-13 05:58:04 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PBL_PBI
|
|
|
|
It enables addition of RCW (Power on reset configuration) in built image.
|
|
|
|
Please refer doc/README.pblimage for more details
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PBL_RCW
|
|
|
|
It adds PBI(pre-boot instructions) commands in u-boot build image.
|
|
|
|
PBI commands can be used to configure SoC before it starts the execution.
|
|
|
|
Please refer doc/README.pblimage for more details
|
|
|
|
|
2014-04-08 13:43:34 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_FSL_PBL
|
|
|
|
It adds a target to create boot binary having SPL binary in PBI format
|
|
|
|
concatenated with u-boot binary.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-10 21:59:42 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_BE
|
|
|
|
Defines the DDR controller register space as Big Endian
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_LE
|
|
|
|
Defines the DDR controller register space as Little Endian
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-10 21:59:43 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_SDRAM_BASE_PHY
|
|
|
|
Physical address from the view of DDR controllers. It is the
|
|
|
|
same as CONFIG_SYS_DDR_SDRAM_BASE for all Power SoCs. But
|
|
|
|
it could be different for ARM SoCs.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-10 21:59:44 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_INTLV_256B
|
|
|
|
DDR controller interleaving on 256-byte. This is a special
|
|
|
|
interleaving mode, handled by Dickens for Freescale layerscape
|
|
|
|
SoCs with ARM core.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-08-01 22:51:00 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_MAIN_NUM_CTRLS
|
|
|
|
Number of controllers used as main memory.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_OTHER_DDR_NUM_CTRLS
|
|
|
|
Number of controllers used for other than main memory.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-09-09 06:20:31 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SEC_BE
|
|
|
|
Defines the SEC controller register space as Big Endian
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SEC_LE
|
|
|
|
Defines the SEC controller register space as Little Endian
|
|
|
|
|
2006-03-24 14:28:02 +00:00
|
|
|
- Intel Monahans options:
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_MONAHANS_RUN_MODE_OSC_RATIO
|
2006-03-24 14:28:02 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defines the Monahans run mode to oscillator
|
|
|
|
ratio. Valid values are 8, 16, 24, 31. The core
|
|
|
|
frequency is this value multiplied by 13 MHz.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_MONAHANS_TURBO_RUN_MODE_RATIO
|
2006-04-16 08:51:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2006-03-24 14:28:02 +00:00
|
|
|
Defines the Monahans turbo mode to oscillator
|
|
|
|
ratio. Valid values are 1 (default if undefined) and
|
2006-04-16 08:51:58 +00:00
|
|
|
2. The core frequency as calculated above is multiplied
|
2006-03-24 14:28:02 +00:00
|
|
|
by this value.
|
2006-04-16 08:51:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-07-27 11:22:39 +00:00
|
|
|
- MIPS CPU options:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_INIT_SP_OFFSET
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Offset relative to CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE for initial stack
|
|
|
|
pointer. This is needed for the temporary stack before
|
|
|
|
relocation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_MIPS_CACHE_MODE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cache operation mode for the MIPS CPU.
|
|
|
|
See also arch/mips/include/asm/mipsregs.h.
|
|
|
|
Possible values are:
|
|
|
|
CONF_CM_CACHABLE_NO_WA
|
|
|
|
CONF_CM_CACHABLE_WA
|
|
|
|
CONF_CM_UNCACHED
|
|
|
|
CONF_CM_CACHABLE_NONCOHERENT
|
|
|
|
CONF_CM_CACHABLE_CE
|
|
|
|
CONF_CM_CACHABLE_COW
|
|
|
|
CONF_CM_CACHABLE_CUW
|
|
|
|
CONF_CM_CACHABLE_ACCELERATED
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_XWAY_EBU_BOOTCFG
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Special option for Lantiq XWAY SoCs for booting from NOR flash.
|
|
|
|
See also arch/mips/cpu/mips32/start.S.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_XWAY_SWAP_BYTES
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enable compilation of tools/xway-swap-bytes needed for Lantiq
|
|
|
|
XWAY SoCs for booting from NOR flash. The U-Boot image needs to
|
|
|
|
be swapped if a flash programmer is used.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-02-02 00:44:39 +00:00
|
|
|
- ARM options:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_EXCEPTION_VECTORS_HIGH
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Select high exception vectors of the ARM core, e.g., do not
|
|
|
|
clear the V bit of the c1 register of CP15.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-03-08 07:20:19 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_THUMB_BUILD
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Use this flag to build U-Boot using the Thumb instruction
|
|
|
|
set for ARM architectures. Thumb instruction set provides
|
|
|
|
better code density. For ARM architectures that support
|
|
|
|
Thumb2 this flag will result in Thumb2 code generated by
|
|
|
|
GCC.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-03-04 13:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_ARM_ERRATA_716044
|
2013-02-26 12:28:27 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_ARM_ERRATA_742230
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_ARM_ERRATA_743622
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_ARM_ERRATA_751472
|
2014-04-02 13:55:01 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_ARM_ERRATA_794072
|
2014-04-02 13:55:02 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_ARM_ERRATA_761320
|
2013-02-26 12:28:27 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If set, the workarounds for these ARM errata are applied early
|
|
|
|
during U-Boot startup. Note that these options force the
|
|
|
|
workarounds to be applied; no CPU-type/version detection
|
|
|
|
exists, unlike the similar options in the Linux kernel. Do not
|
|
|
|
set these options unless they apply!
|
|
|
|
|
2003-10-09 20:09:04 +00:00
|
|
|
- Linux Kernel Interface:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CLOCKS_IN_MHZ
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
U-Boot stores all clock information in Hz
|
|
|
|
internally. For binary compatibility with older Linux
|
|
|
|
kernels (which expect the clocks passed in the
|
|
|
|
bd_info data to be in MHz) the environment variable
|
|
|
|
"clocks_in_mhz" can be defined so that U-Boot
|
|
|
|
converts clock data to MHZ before passing it to the
|
|
|
|
Linux kernel.
|
|
|
|
When CONFIG_CLOCKS_IN_MHZ is defined, a definition of
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
"clocks_in_mhz=1" is automatically included in the
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
default environment.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-10-09 20:09:04 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_MEMSIZE_IN_BYTES [relevant for MIPS only]
|
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
When transferring memsize parameter to linux, some versions
|
2003-10-09 20:09:04 +00:00
|
|
|
expect it to be in bytes, others in MB.
|
|
|
|
Define CONFIG_MEMSIZE_IN_BYTES to make it in bytes.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-06-04 00:34:45 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT
|
2005-10-12 23:45:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
New kernel versions are expecting firmware settings to be
|
2007-03-31 16:23:51 +00:00
|
|
|
passed using flattened device trees (based on open firmware
|
|
|
|
concepts).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT
|
|
|
|
* New libfdt-based support
|
|
|
|
* Adds the "fdt" command
|
2007-08-10 19:34:14 +00:00
|
|
|
* The bootm command automatically updates the fdt
|
2007-03-31 16:23:51 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2009-09-09 19:18:41 +00:00
|
|
|
OF_CPU - The proper name of the cpus node (only required for
|
|
|
|
MPC512X and MPC5xxx based boards).
|
|
|
|
OF_SOC - The proper name of the soc node (only required for
|
|
|
|
MPC512X and MPC5xxx based boards).
|
2005-10-12 23:45:54 +00:00
|
|
|
OF_TBCLK - The timebase frequency.
|
2006-01-11 19:59:02 +00:00
|
|
|
OF_STDOUT_PATH - The path to the console device
|
2005-10-12 23:45:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
boards with QUICC Engines require OF_QE to set UCC MAC
|
|
|
|
addresses
|
2007-08-10 19:34:14 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2006-01-11 19:54:17 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_OF_BOARD_SETUP
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Board code has addition modification that it wants to make
|
|
|
|
to the flat device tree before handing it off to the kernel
|
2005-10-12 23:45:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2006-06-28 15:41:37 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_OF_BOOT_CPU
|
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
This define fills in the correct boot CPU in the boot
|
2006-06-28 15:41:37 +00:00
|
|
|
param header, the default value is zero if undefined.
|
|
|
|
|
2009-09-23 05:56:08 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_OF_IDE_FIXUP
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
U-Boot can detect if an IDE device is present or not.
|
|
|
|
If not, and this new config option is activated, U-Boot
|
|
|
|
removes the ATA node from the DTS before booting Linux,
|
|
|
|
so the Linux IDE driver does not probe the device and
|
|
|
|
crash. This is needed for buggy hardware (uc101) where
|
|
|
|
no pull down resistor is connected to the signal IDE5V_DD7.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-07-14 05:45:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_MACH_TYPE [relevant for ARM only][mandatory]
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This setting is mandatory for all boards that have only one
|
|
|
|
machine type and must be used to specify the machine type
|
|
|
|
number as it appears in the ARM machine registry
|
|
|
|
(see http://www.arm.linux.org.uk/developer/machines/).
|
|
|
|
Only boards that have multiple machine types supported
|
|
|
|
in a single configuration file and the machine type is
|
|
|
|
runtime discoverable, do not have to use this setting.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-11-03 21:13:47 +00:00
|
|
|
- vxWorks boot parameters:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
bootvx constructs a valid bootline using the following
|
|
|
|
environments variables: bootfile, ipaddr, serverip, hostname.
|
|
|
|
It loads the vxWorks image pointed bootfile.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_VXWORKS_BOOT_DEVICE - The vxworks device name
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_VXWORKS_MAC_PTR - Ethernet 6 byte MA -address
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_VXWORKS_SERVERNAME - Name of the server
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_VXWORKS_BOOT_ADDR - Address of boot parameters
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_VXWORKS_ADD_PARAMS
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Add it at the end of the bootline. E.g "u=username pw=secret"
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: If a "bootargs" environment is defined, it will overwride
|
|
|
|
the defaults discussed just above.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-06-16 23:30:47 +00:00
|
|
|
- Cache Configuration:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_ICACHE_OFF - Do not enable instruction cache in U-Boot
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_DCACHE_OFF - Do not enable data cache in U-Boot
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_L2CACHE_OFF- Do not enable L2 cache in U-Boot
|
|
|
|
|
2011-06-16 23:30:51 +00:00
|
|
|
- Cache Configuration for ARM:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_L2_PL310 - Enable support for ARM PL310 L2 cache
|
|
|
|
controller
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_PL310_BASE - Physical base address of PL310
|
|
|
|
controller register space
|
|
|
|
|
2004-08-02 23:22:59 +00:00
|
|
|
- Serial Ports:
|
2008-09-08 12:30:53 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_PL010_SERIAL
|
2004-08-02 23:22:59 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this if you want support for Amba PrimeCell PL010 UARTs.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-09-08 12:30:53 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_PL011_SERIAL
|
2004-08-02 23:22:59 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this if you want support for Amba PrimeCell PL011 UARTs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PL011_CLOCK
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you have Amba PrimeCell PL011 UARTs, set this variable to
|
|
|
|
the clock speed of the UARTs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PL01x_PORTS
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you have Amba PrimeCell PL010 or PL011 UARTs on your board,
|
|
|
|
define this to a list of base addresses for each (supported)
|
|
|
|
port. See e.g. include/configs/versatile.h
|
|
|
|
|
2011-04-19 10:42:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_PL011_SERIAL_RLCR
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some vendor versions of PL011 serial ports (e.g. ST-Ericsson U8500)
|
|
|
|
have separate receive and transmit line control registers. Set
|
|
|
|
this variable to initialize the extra register.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PL011_SERIAL_FLUSH_ON_INIT
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
On some platforms (e.g. U8500) U-Boot is loaded by a second stage
|
|
|
|
boot loader that has already initialized the UART. Define this
|
|
|
|
variable to flush the UART at init time.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-04-09 19:38:46 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SERIAL_HW_FLOW_CONTROL
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this variable to enable hw flow control in serial driver.
|
|
|
|
Current user of this option is drivers/serial/nsl16550.c driver
|
2004-08-02 23:22:59 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Console Interface:
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Depending on board, define exactly one serial port
|
|
|
|
(like CONFIG_8xx_CONS_SMC1, CONFIG_8xx_CONS_SMC2,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_8xx_CONS_SCC1, ...), or switch off the serial
|
|
|
|
console by defining CONFIG_8xx_CONS_NONE
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: if CONFIG_8xx_CONS_NONE is defined, the serial
|
|
|
|
port routines must be defined elsewhere
|
|
|
|
(i.e. serial_init(), serial_getc(), ...)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CFB_CONSOLE
|
|
|
|
Enables console device for a color framebuffer. Needs following
|
2011-12-07 12:19:20 +00:00
|
|
|
defines (cf. smiLynxEM, i8042)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
VIDEO_FB_LITTLE_ENDIAN graphic memory organisation
|
|
|
|
(default big endian)
|
|
|
|
VIDEO_HW_RECTFILL graphic chip supports
|
|
|
|
rectangle fill
|
|
|
|
(cf. smiLynxEM)
|
|
|
|
VIDEO_HW_BITBLT graphic chip supports
|
|
|
|
bit-blit (cf. smiLynxEM)
|
|
|
|
VIDEO_VISIBLE_COLS visible pixel columns
|
|
|
|
(cols=pitch)
|
2004-02-06 23:19:44 +00:00
|
|
|
VIDEO_VISIBLE_ROWS visible pixel rows
|
|
|
|
VIDEO_PIXEL_SIZE bytes per pixel
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
VIDEO_DATA_FORMAT graphic data format
|
|
|
|
(0-5, cf. cfb_console.c)
|
2004-02-06 23:19:44 +00:00
|
|
|
VIDEO_FB_ADRS framebuffer address
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
VIDEO_KBD_INIT_FCT keyboard int fct
|
|
|
|
(i.e. i8042_kbd_init())
|
|
|
|
VIDEO_TSTC_FCT test char fct
|
|
|
|
(i.e. i8042_tstc)
|
|
|
|
VIDEO_GETC_FCT get char fct
|
|
|
|
(i.e. i8042_getc)
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CONSOLE_CURSOR cursor drawing on/off
|
|
|
|
(requires blink timer
|
|
|
|
cf. i8042.c)
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_BLINK_COUNT blink interval (cf. i8042.c)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CONSOLE_TIME display time/date info in
|
|
|
|
upper right corner
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
(requires CONFIG_CMD_DATE)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_VIDEO_LOGO display Linux logo in
|
|
|
|
upper left corner
|
2002-12-03 21:28:10 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_LOGO use bmp_logo.h instead of
|
|
|
|
linux_logo.h for logo.
|
|
|
|
Requires CONFIG_VIDEO_LOGO
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CONSOLE_EXTRA_INFO
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
additional board info beside
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
the logo
|
|
|
|
|
2012-10-19 13:30:09 +00:00
|
|
|
When CONFIG_CFB_CONSOLE_ANSI is defined, console will support
|
|
|
|
a limited number of ANSI escape sequences (cursor control,
|
|
|
|
erase functions and limited graphics rendition control).
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
When CONFIG_CFB_CONSOLE is defined, video console is
|
|
|
|
default i/o. Serial console can be forced with
|
|
|
|
environment 'console=serial'.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-01-02 14:00:00 +00:00
|
|
|
When CONFIG_SILENT_CONSOLE is defined, all console
|
|
|
|
messages (by U-Boot and Linux!) can be silenced with
|
|
|
|
the "silent" environment variable. See
|
|
|
|
doc/README.silent for more information.
|
2003-10-19 23:22:11 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2013-10-22 09:06:06 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_BG_COL: define the backgroundcolor, default
|
|
|
|
is 0x00.
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_FG_COL: define the foregroundcolor, default
|
|
|
|
is 0xa0.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Console Baudrate:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BAUDRATE - in bps
|
|
|
|
Select one of the baudrates listed in
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE, see below.
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_BRGCLK_PRESCALE, baudrate prescale
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2009-01-30 11:55:38 +00:00
|
|
|
- Console Rx buffer length
|
|
|
|
With CONFIG_SYS_SMC_RXBUFLEN it is possible to define
|
|
|
|
the maximum receive buffer length for the SMC.
|
2009-02-10 08:31:47 +00:00
|
|
|
This option is actual only for 82xx and 8xx possible.
|
2009-01-30 11:55:38 +00:00
|
|
|
If using CONFIG_SYS_SMC_RXBUFLEN also CONFIG_SYS_MAXIDLE
|
|
|
|
must be defined, to setup the maximum idle timeout for
|
|
|
|
the SMC.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-09-01 00:48:27 +00:00
|
|
|
- Pre-Console Buffer:
|
2011-10-07 07:58:21 +00:00
|
|
|
Prior to the console being initialised (i.e. serial UART
|
|
|
|
initialised etc) all console output is silently discarded.
|
|
|
|
Defining CONFIG_PRE_CONSOLE_BUFFER will cause U-Boot to
|
|
|
|
buffer any console messages prior to the console being
|
|
|
|
initialised to a buffer of size CONFIG_PRE_CON_BUF_SZ
|
|
|
|
bytes located at CONFIG_PRE_CON_BUF_ADDR. The buffer is
|
|
|
|
a circular buffer, so if more than CONFIG_PRE_CON_BUF_SZ
|
2011-10-09 19:06:34 +00:00
|
|
|
bytes are output before the console is initialised, the
|
2011-10-07 07:58:21 +00:00
|
|
|
earlier bytes are discarded.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
'Sane' compilers will generate smaller code if
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PRE_CON_BUF_SZ is a power of 2
|
2011-09-01 00:48:27 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-11-02 09:52:08 +00:00
|
|
|
- Safe printf() functions
|
|
|
|
Define CONFIG_SYS_VSNPRINTF to compile in safe versions of
|
|
|
|
the printf() functions. These are defined in
|
|
|
|
include/vsprintf.h and include snprintf(), vsnprintf() and
|
|
|
|
so on. Code size increase is approximately 300-500 bytes.
|
|
|
|
If this option is not given then these functions will
|
|
|
|
silently discard their buffer size argument - this means
|
|
|
|
you are not getting any overflow checking in this case.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Boot Delay: CONFIG_BOOTDELAY - in seconds
|
|
|
|
Delay before automatically booting the default image;
|
|
|
|
set to -1 to disable autoboot.
|
2012-08-17 10:53:12 +00:00
|
|
|
set to -2 to autoboot with no delay and not check for abort
|
|
|
|
(even when CONFIG_ZERO_BOOTDELAY_CHECK is defined).
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See doc/README.autoboot for these options that
|
|
|
|
work with CONFIG_BOOTDELAY. None are required.
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_MIN
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_KEYED
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_PROMPT
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_DELAY_STR
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_STOP_STR
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_DELAY_STR2
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_STOP_STR2
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_ZERO_BOOTDELAY_CHECK
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_RESET_TO_RETRY
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Autoboot Command:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTCOMMAND
|
|
|
|
Only needed when CONFIG_BOOTDELAY is enabled;
|
|
|
|
define a command string that is automatically executed
|
|
|
|
when no character is read on the console interface
|
|
|
|
within "Boot Delay" after reset.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTARGS
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
This can be used to pass arguments to the bootm
|
|
|
|
command. The value of CONFIG_BOOTARGS goes into the
|
|
|
|
environment value "bootargs".
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_RAMBOOT and CONFIG_NFSBOOT
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
The value of these goes into the environment as
|
|
|
|
"ramboot" and "nfsboot" respectively, and can be used
|
|
|
|
as a convenience, when switching between booting from
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
RAM and NFS.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2013-11-04 13:04:59 +00:00
|
|
|
- Bootcount:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_LIMIT
|
|
|
|
Implements a mechanism for detecting a repeating reboot
|
|
|
|
cycle, see:
|
|
|
|
http://www.denx.de/wiki/view/DULG/UBootBootCountLimit
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_ENV
|
|
|
|
If no softreset save registers are found on the hardware
|
|
|
|
"bootcount" is stored in the environment. To prevent a
|
|
|
|
saveenv on all reboots, the environment variable
|
|
|
|
"upgrade_available" is used. If "upgrade_available" is
|
|
|
|
0, "bootcount" is always 0, if "upgrade_available" is
|
|
|
|
1 "bootcount" is incremented in the environment.
|
|
|
|
So the Userspace Applikation must set the "upgrade_available"
|
|
|
|
and "bootcount" variable to 0, if a boot was successfully.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Pre-Boot Commands:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PREBOOT
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When this option is #defined, the existence of the
|
|
|
|
environment variable "preboot" will be checked
|
|
|
|
immediately before starting the CONFIG_BOOTDELAY
|
|
|
|
countdown and/or running the auto-boot command resp.
|
|
|
|
entering interactive mode.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This feature is especially useful when "preboot" is
|
|
|
|
automatically generated or modified. For an example
|
|
|
|
see the LWMON board specific code: here "preboot" is
|
|
|
|
modified when the user holds down a certain
|
|
|
|
combination of keys on the (special) keyboard when
|
|
|
|
booting the systems
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Serial Download Echo Mode:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_LOADS_ECHO
|
|
|
|
If defined to 1, all characters received during a
|
|
|
|
serial download (using the "loads" command) are
|
|
|
|
echoed back. This might be needed by some terminal
|
|
|
|
emulations (like "cu"), but may as well just take
|
|
|
|
time on others. This setting #define's the initial
|
|
|
|
value of the "loads_echo" environment variable.
|
|
|
|
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
- Kgdb Serial Baudrate: (if CONFIG_CMD_KGDB is defined)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_KGDB_BAUDRATE
|
|
|
|
Select one of the baudrates listed in
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE, see below.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Monitor Functions:
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
Monitor commands can be included or excluded
|
|
|
|
from the build by using the #include files
|
2012-08-05 16:07:19 +00:00
|
|
|
<config_cmd_all.h> and #undef'ing unwanted
|
|
|
|
commands, or using <config_cmd_default.h>
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
and augmenting with additional #define's
|
|
|
|
for wanted commands.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The default command configuration includes all commands
|
|
|
|
except those marked below with a "*".
|
|
|
|
|
2014-03-05 18:58:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_AES AES 128 CBC encrypt/decrypt
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_ASKENV * ask for env variable
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_BDI bdinfo
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_BEDBUG * Include BedBug Debugger
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_BMP * BMP support
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_BSP * Board specific commands
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_BOOTD bootd
|
2014-08-14 10:42:36 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_BOOTI * ARM64 Linux kernel Image support
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_CACHE * icache, dcache
|
2013-11-21 21:39:02 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_CLK * clock command support
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_CONSOLE coninfo
|
2010-12-21 19:19:51 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_CRC32 * crc32
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_DATE * support for RTC, date/time...
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_DHCP * DHCP support
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_DIAG * Diagnostics
|
2008-12-17 22:36:22 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_DS4510 * ds4510 I2C gpio commands
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_DS4510_INFO * ds4510 I2C info command
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_DS4510_MEM * ds4510 I2C eeprom/sram commansd
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_DS4510_RST * ds4510 I2C rst command
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_DTT * Digital Therm and Thermostat
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_ECHO echo arguments
|
2009-10-25 20:12:56 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_EDITENV edit env variable
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_EEPROM * EEPROM read/write support
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_ELF * bootelf, bootvx
|
2012-12-12 04:16:25 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_ENV_CALLBACK * display details about env callbacks
|
2012-12-12 04:16:33 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_ENV_FLAGS * display details about env flags
|
2013-10-23 00:07:34 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_ENV_EXISTS * check existence of env variable
|
2010-12-27 04:09:45 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_EXPORTENV * export the environment
|
2012-10-22 06:43:50 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_EXT2 * ext2 command support
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_EXT4 * ext4 command support
|
2014-01-25 03:46:37 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_FS_GENERIC * filesystem commands (e.g. load, ls)
|
|
|
|
that work for multiple fs types
|
2009-01-29 00:08:14 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_SAVEENV saveenv
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_FDC * Floppy Disk Support
|
2012-10-22 06:43:50 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_FAT * FAT command support
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_FLASH flinfo, erase, protect
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_FPGA FPGA device initialization support
|
2013-06-20 16:14:22 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_FUSE * Device fuse support
|
2012-12-05 14:46:29 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_GETTIME * Get time since boot
|
2010-12-27 04:32:22 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_GO * the 'go' command (exec code)
|
2011-04-05 07:15:14 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_GREPENV * search environment
|
2012-12-05 14:46:38 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_HASH * calculate hash / digest
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_HWFLOW * RTS/CTS hw flow control
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_I2C * I2C serial bus support
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_IDE * IDE harddisk support
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_IMI iminfo
|
2012-12-16 22:32:48 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_IMLS List all images found in NOR flash
|
2013-06-20 16:14:22 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_IMLS_NAND * List all images found in NAND flash
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_IMMAP * IMMR dump support
|
2014-06-12 05:29:41 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_IOTRACE * I/O tracing for debugging
|
2010-12-27 04:09:45 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_IMPORTENV * import an environment
|
2012-10-03 11:15:51 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_INI * import data from an ini file into the env
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_IRQ * irqinfo
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_ITEST Integer/string test of 2 values
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_JFFS2 * JFFS2 Support
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_KGDB * kgdb
|
2013-06-20 16:14:22 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_LDRINFO * ldrinfo (display Blackfin loader)
|
2012-05-23 08:00:12 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_LINK_LOCAL * link-local IP address auto-configuration
|
|
|
|
(169.254.*.*)
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_LOADB loadb
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_LOADS loads
|
2013-06-20 16:14:22 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_MD5SUM * print md5 message digest
|
2009-07-27 04:07:59 +00:00
|
|
|
(requires CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY and CONFIG_MD5)
|
2012-11-30 13:01:20 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_MEMINFO * Display detailed memory information
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY md, mm, nm, mw, cp, cmp, crc, base,
|
2013-03-08 10:51:32 +00:00
|
|
|
loop, loopw
|
2013-06-20 16:14:22 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_MEMTEST * mtest
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_MISC Misc functions like sleep etc
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_MMC * MMC memory mapped support
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_MII * MII utility commands
|
2009-03-19 12:30:36 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_MTDPARTS * MTD partition support
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_NAND * NAND support
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_NET bootp, tftpboot, rarpboot
|
2013-06-20 16:14:22 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_NFS NFS support
|
2008-12-17 22:36:21 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_PCA953X * PCA953x I2C gpio commands
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_PCA953X_INFO * PCA953x I2C gpio info command
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_PCI * pciinfo
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_PCMCIA * PCMCIA support
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_PING * send ICMP ECHO_REQUEST to network
|
|
|
|
host
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_PORTIO * Port I/O
|
2012-12-05 14:46:30 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_READ * Read raw data from partition
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_REGINFO * Register dump
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_RUN run command in env variable
|
2012-12-26 09:53:36 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_SANDBOX * sb command to access sandbox features
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_SAVES * save S record dump
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_SCSI * SCSI Support
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_SDRAM * print SDRAM configuration information
|
|
|
|
(requires CONFIG_CMD_I2C)
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_SETGETDCR Support for DCR Register access
|
|
|
|
(4xx only)
|
2012-01-31 17:52:08 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_SF * Read/write/erase SPI NOR flash
|
2013-06-20 16:14:22 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_SHA1SUM * print sha1 memory digest
|
2009-07-27 04:07:59 +00:00
|
|
|
(requires CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY)
|
2013-02-05 11:05:41 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_SOFTSWITCH * Soft switch setting command for BF60x
|
2009-04-01 21:34:12 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_SOURCE "source" command Support
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_SPI * SPI serial bus support
|
2011-05-17 00:03:40 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_TFTPSRV * TFTP transfer in server mode
|
2011-10-24 18:00:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_TFTPPUT * TFTP put command (upload)
|
2012-10-03 12:14:57 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_TIME * run command and report execution time (ARM specific)
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_TIMER * access to the system tick timer
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_USB * USB support
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_CDP * Cisco Discover Protocol support
|
2012-03-31 07:47:16 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_MFSL * Microblaze FSL support
|
2013-06-20 16:14:22 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_XIMG Load part of Multi Image
|
2014-04-02 08:20:05 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_UUID * Generate random UUID or GUID string
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
EXAMPLE: If you want all functions except of network
|
|
|
|
support you can write:
|
|
|
|
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
#include "config_cmd_all.h"
|
|
|
|
#undef CONFIG_CMD_NET
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2007-03-31 16:23:51 +00:00
|
|
|
Other Commands:
|
|
|
|
fdt (flattened device tree) command: CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: Don't enable the "icache" and "dcache" commands
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
(configuration option CONFIG_CMD_CACHE) unless you know
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
what you (and your U-Boot users) are doing. Data
|
|
|
|
cache cannot be enabled on systems like the 8xx or
|
|
|
|
8260 (where accesses to the IMMR region must be
|
|
|
|
uncached), and it cannot be disabled on all other
|
|
|
|
systems where we (mis-) use the data cache to hold an
|
|
|
|
initial stack and some data.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XXX - this list needs to get updated!
|
|
|
|
|
2013-03-23 23:50:31 +00:00
|
|
|
- Regular expression support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_REGEX
|
2013-10-04 15:43:24 +00:00
|
|
|
If this variable is defined, U-Boot is linked against
|
|
|
|
the SLRE (Super Light Regular Expression) library,
|
|
|
|
which adds regex support to some commands, as for
|
|
|
|
example "env grep" and "setexpr".
|
2013-03-23 23:50:31 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-10-15 05:48:20 +00:00
|
|
|
- Device tree:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_OF_CONTROL
|
|
|
|
If this variable is defined, U-Boot will use a device tree
|
|
|
|
to configure its devices, instead of relying on statically
|
|
|
|
compiled #defines in the board file. This option is
|
|
|
|
experimental and only available on a few boards. The device
|
|
|
|
tree is available in the global data as gd->fdt_blob.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-10-24 19:15:31 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot needs to get its device tree from somewhere. This can
|
|
|
|
be done using one of the two options below:
|
2011-10-15 05:48:21 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_OF_EMBED
|
|
|
|
If this variable is defined, U-Boot will embed a device tree
|
|
|
|
binary in its image. This device tree file should be in the
|
|
|
|
board directory and called <soc>-<board>.dts. The binary file
|
|
|
|
is then picked up in board_init_f() and made available through
|
|
|
|
the global data structure as gd->blob.
|
2011-10-15 05:48:20 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-10-24 19:15:31 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_OF_SEPARATE
|
|
|
|
If this variable is defined, U-Boot will build a device tree
|
|
|
|
binary. It will be called u-boot.dtb. Architecture-specific
|
|
|
|
code will locate it at run-time. Generally this works by:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
cat u-boot.bin u-boot.dtb >image.bin
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
and in fact, U-Boot does this for you, creating a file called
|
|
|
|
u-boot-dtb.bin which is useful in the common case. You can
|
|
|
|
still use the individual files if you need something more
|
|
|
|
exotic.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Watchdog:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_WATCHDOG
|
|
|
|
If this variable is defined, it enables watchdog
|
2011-04-27 05:25:59 +00:00
|
|
|
support for the SoC. There must be support in the SoC
|
|
|
|
specific code for a watchdog. For the 8xx and 8260
|
|
|
|
CPUs, the SIU Watchdog feature is enabled in the SYPCR
|
|
|
|
register. When supported for a specific SoC is
|
|
|
|
available, then no further board specific code should
|
|
|
|
be needed to use it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_HW_WATCHDOG
|
|
|
|
When using a watchdog circuitry external to the used
|
|
|
|
SoC, then define this variable and provide board
|
|
|
|
specific code for the "hw_watchdog_reset" function.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-04-04 15:53:41 +00:00
|
|
|
- U-Boot Version:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_VERSION_VARIABLE
|
|
|
|
If this variable is defined, an environment variable
|
|
|
|
named "ver" is created by U-Boot showing the U-Boot
|
|
|
|
version as printed by the "version" command.
|
2012-08-13 13:01:14 +00:00
|
|
|
Any change to this variable will be reverted at the
|
|
|
|
next reset.
|
2003-04-04 15:53:41 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Real-Time Clock:
|
|
|
|
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
When CONFIG_CMD_DATE is selected, the type of the RTC
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
has to be selected, too. Define exactly one of the
|
|
|
|
following options:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_MPC8xx - use internal RTC of MPC8xx
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_PCF8563 - use Philips PCF8563 RTC
|
2011-10-24 06:44:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_MC13XXX - use MC13783 or MC13892 RTC
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_MC146818 - use MC146818 RTC
|
2003-03-06 21:55:29 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_DS1307 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1307 RTC
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_DS1337 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1337 RTC
|
2003-05-20 14:25:27 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_DS1338 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1338 RTC
|
2014-07-21 09:06:16 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_DS1339 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1339 RTC
|
2003-03-12 10:41:04 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_DS164x - use Dallas DS164x RTC
|
2008-03-15 14:40:26 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_ISL1208 - use Intersil ISL1208 RTC
|
2004-06-09 17:34:58 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_MAX6900 - use Maxim, Inc. MAX6900 RTC
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_RTC_DS1337_NOOSC - Turn off the OSC output for DS1337
|
2011-03-28 07:24:22 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_RV3029_TCR - enable trickle charger on
|
|
|
|
RV3029 RTC.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
Note that if the RTC uses I2C, then the I2C interface
|
|
|
|
must also be configured. See I2C Support, below.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-12-17 22:36:21 +00:00
|
|
|
- GPIO Support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PCA953X - use NXP's PCA953X series I2C GPIO
|
|
|
|
|
2010-12-19 10:12:13 +00:00
|
|
|
The CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PCA953X_WIDTH option specifies a list of
|
|
|
|
chip-ngpio pairs that tell the PCA953X driver the number of
|
|
|
|
pins supported by a particular chip.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-12-17 22:36:21 +00:00
|
|
|
Note that if the GPIO device uses I2C, then the I2C interface
|
|
|
|
must also be configured. See I2C Support, below.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-06-12 05:29:41 +00:00
|
|
|
- I/O tracing:
|
|
|
|
When CONFIG_IO_TRACE is selected, U-Boot intercepts all I/O
|
|
|
|
accesses and can checksum them or write a list of them out
|
|
|
|
to memory. See the 'iotrace' command for details. This is
|
|
|
|
useful for testing device drivers since it can confirm that
|
|
|
|
the driver behaves the same way before and after a code
|
|
|
|
change. Currently this is supported on sandbox and arm. To
|
|
|
|
add support for your architecture, add '#include <iotrace.h>'
|
|
|
|
to the bottom of arch/<arch>/include/asm/io.h and test.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example output from the 'iotrace stats' command is below.
|
|
|
|
Note that if the trace buffer is exhausted, the checksum will
|
|
|
|
still continue to operate.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
iotrace is enabled
|
|
|
|
Start: 10000000 (buffer start address)
|
|
|
|
Size: 00010000 (buffer size)
|
|
|
|
Offset: 00000120 (current buffer offset)
|
|
|
|
Output: 10000120 (start + offset)
|
|
|
|
Count: 00000018 (number of trace records)
|
|
|
|
CRC32: 9526fb66 (CRC32 of all trace records)
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Timestamp Support:
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
When CONFIG_TIMESTAMP is selected, the timestamp
|
|
|
|
(date and time) of an image is printed by image
|
|
|
|
commands like bootm or iminfo. This option is
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
automatically enabled when you select CONFIG_CMD_DATE .
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-08-16 06:20:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- Partition Labels (disklabels) Supported:
|
|
|
|
Zero or more of the following:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_MAC_PARTITION Apple's MacOS partition table.
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_DOS_PARTITION MS Dos partition table, traditional on the
|
|
|
|
Intel architecture, USB sticks, etc.
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_ISO_PARTITION ISO partition table, used on CDROM etc.
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_EFI_PARTITION GPT partition table, common when EFI is the
|
|
|
|
bootloader. Note 2TB partition limit; see
|
|
|
|
disk/part_efi.c
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_MTD_PARTITIONS Memory Technology Device partition table.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
If IDE or SCSI support is enabled (CONFIG_CMD_IDE or
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_SCSI) you must configure support for at
|
2012-08-16 06:20:15 +00:00
|
|
|
least one non-MTD partition type as well.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- IDE Reset method:
|
2004-03-14 14:09:05 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_IDE_RESET_ROUTINE - this is defined in several
|
|
|
|
board configurations files but used nowhere!
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-03-14 14:09:05 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_IDE_RESET - is this is defined, IDE Reset will
|
|
|
|
be performed by calling the function
|
|
|
|
ide_set_reset(int reset)
|
|
|
|
which has to be defined in a board specific file
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- ATAPI Support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_ATAPI
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Set this to enable ATAPI support.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-03-13 23:29:43 +00:00
|
|
|
- LBA48 Support
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_LBA48
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Set this to enable support for disks larger than 137GB
|
2009-12-03 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
Also look at CONFIG_SYS_64BIT_LBA.
|
2004-03-13 23:29:43 +00:00
|
|
|
Whithout these , LBA48 support uses 32bit variables and will 'only'
|
|
|
|
support disks up to 2.1TB.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_64BIT_LBA:
|
2004-03-13 23:29:43 +00:00
|
|
|
When enabled, makes the IDE subsystem use 64bit sector addresses.
|
|
|
|
Default is 32bit.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- SCSI Support:
|
|
|
|
At the moment only there is only support for the
|
|
|
|
SYM53C8XX SCSI controller; define
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_SYM53C8XX to enable it.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_LUN [8], CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_SCSI_ID [7] and
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_DEVICE [CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_SCSI_ID *
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_LUN] can be adjusted to define the
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
maximum numbers of LUNs, SCSI ID's and target
|
|
|
|
devices.
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_SYM53C8XX_CCF to fix clock timing (80Mhz)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2013-10-04 15:43:24 +00:00
|
|
|
The environment variable 'scsidevs' is set to the number of
|
|
|
|
SCSI devices found during the last scan.
|
2012-10-29 05:23:48 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- NETWORK Support (PCI):
|
2003-06-03 23:54:09 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_E1000
|
e1000: Allow direct access to the E1000 SPI EEPROM device
As a part of the manufacturing process for some of our custom hardware,
we are programming the EEPROMs attached to our Intel 82571EB controllers
from software using U-Boot and Linux.
This code provides several conditionally-compiled features to assist in
our manufacturing process:
CONFIG_CMD_E1000:
This is a basic "e1000" command which allows querying the controller
and (if other config options are set) performing EEPROM programming.
In particular, with CONFIG_E1000_SPI this allows you to display a
hex-dump of the EEPROM, copy to/from main memory, and verify/update
the software checksum.
CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC:
Build a generic SPI driver providing the standard U-Boot SPI driver
interface. This allows commands such as "sspi" to access the bus
attached to the E1000 controller. Additionally, some E1000 chipsets
can support user data in a reserved space in the E1000 EEPROM which
could be used for U-Boot environment storage.
CONFIG_E1000_SPI:
The core SPI access code used by the above interfaces.
For example, the following commands allow you to program the EEPROM from
a USB device (assumes CONFIG_E1000_SPI and CONFIG_CMD_E1000 are enabled):
usb start
fatload usb 0 $loadaddr 82571EB_No_Mgmt_Discrete-LOM.bin
e1000 0 spi program $loadaddr 0 1024
e1000 0 spi checksum update
Please keep in mind that the Intel-provided .eep files are organized as
16-bit words. When converting them to binary form for programming you
must byteswap each 16-bit word so that it is in little-endian form.
This means that when reading and writing words to the SPI EEPROM, the
bit ordering for each word looks like this on the wire:
Time >>>
------------------------------------------------------------------
... [7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0, 15, 14, 13, 12, 11, 10, 9, 8], ...
------------------------------------------------------------------
(MSB is 15, LSB is 0).
Signed-off-by: Kyle Moffett <Kyle.D.Moffett@boeing.com>
Cc: Ben Warren <biggerbadderben@gmail.com>
2011-10-18 11:05:29 +00:00
|
|
|
Support for Intel 8254x/8257x gigabit chips.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_E1000_SPI
|
|
|
|
Utility code for direct access to the SPI bus on Intel 8257x.
|
|
|
|
This does not do anything useful unless you set at least one
|
|
|
|
of CONFIG_CMD_E1000 or CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC
|
|
|
|
Allow generic access to the SPI bus on the Intel 8257x, for
|
|
|
|
example with the "sspi" command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_E1000
|
|
|
|
Management command for E1000 devices. When used on devices
|
|
|
|
with SPI support you can reprogram the EEPROM from U-Boot.
|
2003-06-05 15:39:44 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-03-06 15:45:44 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_E1000_FALLBACK_MAC
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
default MAC for empty EEPROM after production.
|
2008-03-06 15:45:44 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_EEPRO100
|
|
|
|
Support for Intel 82557/82559/82559ER chips.
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
Optional CONFIG_EEPRO100_SROM_WRITE enables EEPROM
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
write routine for first time initialisation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_TULIP
|
|
|
|
Support for Digital 2114x chips.
|
|
|
|
Optional CONFIG_TULIP_SELECT_MEDIA for board specific
|
|
|
|
modem chip initialisation (KS8761/QS6611).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_NATSEMI
|
|
|
|
Support for National dp83815 chips.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_NS8382X
|
|
|
|
Support for National dp8382[01] gigabit chips.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-05-12 21:50:16 +00:00
|
|
|
- NETWORK Support (other):
|
|
|
|
|
2010-01-23 11:03:45 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_DRIVER_AT91EMAC
|
|
|
|
Support for AT91RM9200 EMAC.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_RMII
|
|
|
|
Define this to use reduced MII inteface
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_DRIVER_AT91EMAC_QUIET
|
|
|
|
If this defined, the driver is quiet.
|
|
|
|
The driver doen't show link status messages.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-12-15 11:15:49 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CALXEDA_XGMAC
|
|
|
|
Support for the Calxeda XGMAC device
|
|
|
|
|
2012-10-15 06:20:47 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_LAN91C96
|
2003-05-12 21:50:16 +00:00
|
|
|
Support for SMSC's LAN91C96 chips.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_LAN91C96_BASE
|
|
|
|
Define this to hold the physical address
|
|
|
|
of the LAN91C96's I/O space
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_LAN91C96_USE_32_BIT
|
|
|
|
Define this to enable 32 bit addressing
|
|
|
|
|
2012-10-15 06:20:47 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SMC91111
|
2004-06-09 13:37:52 +00:00
|
|
|
Support for SMSC's LAN91C111 chip
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SMC91111_BASE
|
|
|
|
Define this to hold the physical address
|
|
|
|
of the device (I/O space)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SMC_USE_32_BIT
|
|
|
|
Define this if data bus is 32 bits
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SMC_USE_IOFUNCS
|
|
|
|
Define this to use i/o functions instead of macros
|
|
|
|
(some hardware wont work with macros)
|
|
|
|
|
2011-11-15 15:00:04 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_DRIVER_TI_EMAC
|
|
|
|
Support for davinci emac
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_DAVINCI_EMAC_PHY_COUNT
|
|
|
|
Define this if you have more then 3 PHYs.
|
|
|
|
|
2010-12-21 08:59:46 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_FTGMAC100
|
|
|
|
Support for Faraday's FTGMAC100 Gigabit SoC Ethernet
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_FTGMAC100_EGIGA
|
|
|
|
Define this to use GE link update with gigabit PHY.
|
|
|
|
Define this if FTGMAC100 is connected to gigabit PHY.
|
|
|
|
If your system has 10/100 PHY only, it might not occur
|
|
|
|
wrong behavior. Because PHY usually return timeout or
|
|
|
|
useless data when polling gigabit status and gigabit
|
|
|
|
control registers. This behavior won't affect the
|
|
|
|
correctnessof 10/100 link speed update.
|
|
|
|
|
2009-11-11 08:03:03 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SMC911X
|
2008-05-05 12:06:11 +00:00
|
|
|
Support for SMSC's LAN911x and LAN921x chips
|
|
|
|
|
2009-11-11 08:03:03 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SMC911X_BASE
|
2008-05-05 12:06:11 +00:00
|
|
|
Define this to hold the physical address
|
|
|
|
of the device (I/O space)
|
|
|
|
|
2009-11-11 08:03:03 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SMC911X_32_BIT
|
2008-05-05 12:06:11 +00:00
|
|
|
Define this if data bus is 32 bits
|
|
|
|
|
2009-11-11 08:03:03 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SMC911X_16_BIT
|
2008-05-05 12:06:11 +00:00
|
|
|
Define this if data bus is 16 bits. If your processor
|
|
|
|
automatically converts one 32 bit word to two 16 bit
|
2009-11-11 08:03:03 +00:00
|
|
|
words you may also try CONFIG_SMC911X_32_BIT.
|
2008-05-05 12:06:11 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-01-27 01:06:03 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SH_ETHER
|
|
|
|
Support for Renesas on-chip Ethernet controller
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SH_ETHER_USE_PORT
|
|
|
|
Define the number of ports to be used
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SH_ETHER_PHY_ADDR
|
|
|
|
Define the ETH PHY's address
|
|
|
|
|
2011-01-27 01:06:08 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SH_ETHER_CACHE_WRITEBACK
|
|
|
|
If this option is set, the driver enables cache flush.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-07-18 04:07:19 +00:00
|
|
|
- PWM Support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PWM_IMX
|
|
|
|
Support for PWM modul on the imx6.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-10-17 08:36:14 +00:00
|
|
|
- TPM Support:
|
2013-04-12 11:04:34 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM
|
|
|
|
Support TPM devices.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-12 11:04:37 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM_TIS_I2C
|
|
|
|
Support for i2c bus TPM devices. Only one device
|
|
|
|
per system is supported at this time.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM_TIS_I2C_BUS_NUMBER
|
|
|
|
Define the the i2c bus number for the TPM device
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM_TIS_I2C_SLAVE_ADDRESS
|
|
|
|
Define the TPM's address on the i2c bus
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM_TIS_I2C_BURST_LIMITATION
|
|
|
|
Define the burst count bytes upper limit
|
|
|
|
|
2013-06-26 13:55:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM_ATMEL_TWI
|
|
|
|
Support for Atmel TWI TPM device. Requires I2C support.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-12 11:04:34 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM_TIS_LPC
|
2011-10-17 08:36:14 +00:00
|
|
|
Support for generic parallel port TPM devices. Only one device
|
|
|
|
per system is supported at this time.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM_TIS_BASE_ADDRESS
|
|
|
|
Base address where the generic TPM device is mapped
|
|
|
|
to. Contemporary x86 systems usually map it at
|
|
|
|
0xfed40000.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-06-26 13:55:13 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_TPM
|
|
|
|
Add tpm monitor functions.
|
|
|
|
Requires CONFIG_TPM. If CONFIG_TPM_AUTH_SESSIONS is set, also
|
|
|
|
provides monitor access to authorized functions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM
|
|
|
|
Define this to enable the TPM support library which provides
|
|
|
|
functional interfaces to some TPM commands.
|
|
|
|
Requires support for a TPM device.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM_AUTH_SESSIONS
|
|
|
|
Define this to enable authorized functions in the TPM library.
|
|
|
|
Requires CONFIG_TPM and CONFIG_SHA1.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- USB Support:
|
|
|
|
At the moment only the UHCI host controller is
|
2004-03-14 14:09:05 +00:00
|
|
|
supported (PIP405, MIP405, MPC5200); define
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_USB_UHCI to enable it.
|
|
|
|
define CONFIG_USB_KEYBOARD to enable the USB Keyboard
|
2004-10-09 22:44:59 +00:00
|
|
|
and define CONFIG_USB_STORAGE to enable the USB
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
storage devices.
|
|
|
|
Note:
|
|
|
|
Supported are USB Keyboards and USB Floppy drives
|
|
|
|
(TEAC FD-05PUB).
|
2004-03-14 14:09:05 +00:00
|
|
|
MPC5200 USB requires additional defines:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_USB_CLOCK
|
|
|
|
for 528 MHz Clock: 0x0001bbbb
|
2009-08-13 13:32:37 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_PSC3_USB
|
|
|
|
for USB on PSC3
|
2004-03-14 14:09:05 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_USB_CONFIG
|
|
|
|
for differential drivers: 0x00001000
|
|
|
|
for single ended drivers: 0x00005000
|
2009-08-13 13:32:37 +00:00
|
|
|
for differential drivers on PSC3: 0x00000100
|
|
|
|
for single ended drivers on PSC3: 0x00004100
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_USB_EVENT_POLL
|
2007-06-06 08:08:13 +00:00
|
|
|
May be defined to allow interrupt polling
|
|
|
|
instead of using asynchronous interrupts
|
2004-03-14 14:09:05 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-02-27 10:52:47 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_USB_EHCI_TXFIFO_THRESH enables setting of the
|
|
|
|
txfilltuning field in the EHCI controller on reset.
|
|
|
|
|
2006-06-14 15:45:53 +00:00
|
|
|
- USB Device:
|
|
|
|
Define the below if you wish to use the USB console.
|
|
|
|
Once firmware is rebuilt from a serial console issue the
|
|
|
|
command "setenv stdin usbtty; setenv stdout usbtty" and
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
attach your USB cable. The Unix command "dmesg" should print
|
2006-06-14 15:45:53 +00:00
|
|
|
it has found a new device. The environment variable usbtty
|
|
|
|
can be set to gserial or cdc_acm to enable your device to
|
2006-06-14 16:14:56 +00:00
|
|
|
appear to a USB host as a Linux gserial device or a
|
2006-06-14 15:45:53 +00:00
|
|
|
Common Device Class Abstract Control Model serial device.
|
|
|
|
If you select usbtty = gserial you should be able to enumerate
|
|
|
|
a Linux host by
|
|
|
|
# modprobe usbserial vendor=0xVendorID product=0xProductID
|
|
|
|
else if using cdc_acm, simply setting the environment
|
|
|
|
variable usbtty to be cdc_acm should suffice. The following
|
|
|
|
might be defined in YourBoardName.h
|
2006-06-14 16:14:56 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2006-06-14 15:45:53 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_USB_DEVICE
|
|
|
|
Define this to build a UDC device
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_USB_TTY
|
|
|
|
Define this to have a tty type of device available to
|
|
|
|
talk to the UDC device
|
2006-06-14 16:14:56 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-03-26 10:08:06 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_USBD_HS
|
|
|
|
Define this to enable the high speed support for usb
|
|
|
|
device and usbtty. If this feature is enabled, a routine
|
|
|
|
int is_usbd_high_speed(void)
|
|
|
|
also needs to be defined by the driver to dynamically poll
|
|
|
|
whether the enumeration has succeded at high speed or full
|
|
|
|
speed.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_IS_IN_ENV
|
2006-06-14 15:45:53 +00:00
|
|
|
Define this if you want stdin, stdout &/or stderr to
|
|
|
|
be set to usbtty.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
mpc8xx:
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_USB_EXTC_CLK 0xBLAH
|
2006-06-14 15:45:53 +00:00
|
|
|
Derive USB clock from external clock "blah"
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_USB_EXTC_CLK 0x02
|
2006-06-14 16:14:56 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_USB_BRG_CLK 0xBLAH
|
2006-06-14 15:45:53 +00:00
|
|
|
Derive USB clock from brgclk
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_USB_BRG_CLK 0x04
|
2006-06-14 15:45:53 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2006-06-14 16:14:56 +00:00
|
|
|
If you have a USB-IF assigned VendorID then you may wish to
|
2006-06-14 15:45:53 +00:00
|
|
|
define your own vendor specific values either in BoardName.h
|
2006-06-14 16:14:56 +00:00
|
|
|
or directly in usbd_vendor_info.h. If you don't define
|
2006-06-14 15:45:53 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER, CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID and CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID, then U-Boot
|
|
|
|
should pretend to be a Linux device to it's target host.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER
|
|
|
|
Define this string as the name of your company for
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER "my company"
|
2006-06-14 16:14:56 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2006-06-14 15:45:53 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME
|
|
|
|
Define this string as the name of your product
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME "acme usb device"
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID
|
|
|
|
Define this as your assigned Vendor ID from the USB
|
|
|
|
Implementors Forum. This *must* be a genuine Vendor ID
|
|
|
|
to avoid polluting the USB namespace.
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID 0xFFFF
|
2006-06-14 16:14:56 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2006-06-14 15:45:53 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID
|
|
|
|
Define this as the unique Product ID
|
|
|
|
for your device
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID 0xFFFF
|
2004-03-14 14:09:05 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-12-12 10:08:35 +00:00
|
|
|
- ULPI Layer Support:
|
|
|
|
The ULPI (UTMI Low Pin (count) Interface) PHYs are supported via
|
|
|
|
the generic ULPI layer. The generic layer accesses the ULPI PHY
|
|
|
|
via the platform viewport, so you need both the genric layer and
|
|
|
|
the viewport enabled. Currently only Chipidea/ARC based
|
|
|
|
viewport is supported.
|
|
|
|
To enable the ULPI layer support, define CONFIG_USB_ULPI and
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_USB_ULPI_VIEWPORT in your board configuration file.
|
2012-09-30 22:44:35 +00:00
|
|
|
If your ULPI phy needs a different reference clock than the
|
|
|
|
standard 24 MHz then you have to define CONFIG_ULPI_REF_CLK to
|
|
|
|
the appropriate value in Hz.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-06-15 22:40:42 +00:00
|
|
|
- MMC Support:
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
The MMC controller on the Intel PXA is supported. To
|
|
|
|
enable this define CONFIG_MMC. The MMC can be
|
|
|
|
accessed from the boot prompt by mapping the device
|
2003-06-15 22:40:42 +00:00
|
|
|
to physical memory similar to flash. Command line is
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
enabled with CONFIG_CMD_MMC. The MMC driver also works with
|
|
|
|
the FAT fs. This is enabled with CONFIG_CMD_FAT.
|
2003-06-15 22:40:42 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-07-04 22:21:22 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SH_MMCIF
|
|
|
|
Support for Renesas on-chip MMCIF controller
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SH_MMCIF_ADDR
|
|
|
|
Define the base address of MMCIF registers
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SH_MMCIF_CLK
|
|
|
|
Define the clock frequency for MMCIF
|
|
|
|
|
2014-04-24 08:30:08 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_GENERIC_MMC
|
|
|
|
Enable the generic MMC driver
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SUPPORT_EMMC_BOOT
|
|
|
|
Enable some additional features of the eMMC boot partitions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SUPPORT_EMMC_RPMB
|
|
|
|
Enable the commands for reading, writing and programming the
|
|
|
|
key for the Replay Protection Memory Block partition in eMMC.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-03-14 05:32:47 +00:00
|
|
|
- USB Device Firmware Update (DFU) class support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_DFU_FUNCTION
|
|
|
|
This enables the USB portion of the DFU USB class
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_DFU
|
|
|
|
This enables the command "dfu" which is used to have
|
|
|
|
U-Boot create a DFU class device via USB. This command
|
|
|
|
requires that the "dfu_alt_info" environment variable be
|
|
|
|
set and define the alt settings to expose to the host.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_DFU_MMC
|
|
|
|
This enables support for exposing (e)MMC devices via DFU.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-03-14 05:32:52 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_DFU_NAND
|
|
|
|
This enables support for exposing NAND devices via DFU.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-09-17 19:45:24 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_DFU_RAM
|
|
|
|
This enables support for exposing RAM via DFU.
|
|
|
|
Note: DFU spec refer to non-volatile memory usage, but
|
|
|
|
allow usages beyond the scope of spec - here RAM usage,
|
|
|
|
one that would help mostly the developer.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-06-12 04:05:51 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_DFU_DATA_BUF_SIZE
|
|
|
|
Dfu transfer uses a buffer before writing data to the
|
|
|
|
raw storage device. Make the size (in bytes) of this buffer
|
|
|
|
configurable. The size of this buffer is also configurable
|
|
|
|
through the "dfu_bufsiz" environment variable.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-03-14 05:32:48 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_DFU_MAX_FILE_SIZE
|
|
|
|
When updating files rather than the raw storage device,
|
|
|
|
we use a static buffer to copy the file into and then write
|
|
|
|
the buffer once we've been given the whole file. Define
|
|
|
|
this to the maximum filesize (in bytes) for the buffer.
|
|
|
|
Default is 4 MiB if undefined.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-03-18 07:09:56 +00:00
|
|
|
DFU_DEFAULT_POLL_TIMEOUT
|
|
|
|
Poll timeout [ms], is the timeout a device can send to the
|
|
|
|
host. The host must wait for this timeout before sending
|
|
|
|
a subsequent DFU_GET_STATUS request to the device.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
DFU_MANIFEST_POLL_TIMEOUT
|
|
|
|
Poll timeout [ms], which the device sends to the host when
|
|
|
|
entering dfuMANIFEST state. Host waits this timeout, before
|
|
|
|
sending again an USB request to the device.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-05-05 20:08:10 +00:00
|
|
|
- USB Device Android Fastboot support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_FASTBOOT
|
|
|
|
This enables the command "fastboot" which enables the Android
|
|
|
|
fastboot mode for the platform's USB device. Fastboot is a USB
|
|
|
|
protocol for downloading images, flashing and device control
|
|
|
|
used on Android devices.
|
|
|
|
See doc/README.android-fastboot for more information.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_ANDROID_BOOT_IMAGE
|
|
|
|
This enables support for booting images which use the Android
|
|
|
|
image format header.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_USB_FASTBOOT_BUF_ADDR
|
|
|
|
The fastboot protocol requires a large memory buffer for
|
|
|
|
downloads. Define this to the starting RAM address to use for
|
|
|
|
downloaded images.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_USB_FASTBOOT_BUF_SIZE
|
|
|
|
The fastboot protocol requires a large memory buffer for
|
|
|
|
downloads. This buffer should be as large as possible for a
|
|
|
|
platform. Define this to the size available RAM for fastboot.
|
2014-08-26 18:47:28 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_FASTBOOT_FLASH
|
|
|
|
The fastboot protocol includes a "flash" command for writing
|
|
|
|
the downloaded image to a non-volatile storage device. Define
|
|
|
|
this to enable the "fastboot flash" command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_FASTBOOT_FLASH_MMC_DEV
|
|
|
|
The fastboot "flash" command requires additional information
|
|
|
|
regarding the non-volatile storage device. Define this to
|
|
|
|
the eMMC device that fastboot should use to store the image.
|
2014-05-05 20:08:10 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-08-02 23:22:59 +00:00
|
|
|
- Journaling Flash filesystem support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_JFFS2_NAND, CONFIG_JFFS2_NAND_OFF, CONFIG_JFFS2_NAND_SIZE,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_JFFS2_NAND_DEV
|
|
|
|
Define these for a default partition on a NAND device
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_SECTOR,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_BANK, CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_NUM_BANKS
|
2004-08-02 23:22:59 +00:00
|
|
|
Define these for a default partition on a NOR device
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_JFFS_CUSTOM_PART
|
2004-08-02 23:22:59 +00:00
|
|
|
Define this to create an own partition. You have to provide a
|
|
|
|
function struct part_info* jffs2_part_info(int part_num)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you define only one JFFS2 partition you may also want to
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
#define CONFIG_SYS_JFFS_SINGLE_PART 1
|
2004-08-02 23:22:59 +00:00
|
|
|
to disable the command chpart. This is the default when you
|
|
|
|
have not defined a custom partition
|
|
|
|
|
2011-10-24 21:15:28 +00:00
|
|
|
- FAT(File Allocation Table) filesystem write function support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_FAT_WRITE
|
2012-03-22 04:38:56 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this to enable support for saving memory data as a
|
|
|
|
file in FAT formatted partition.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This will also enable the command "fatwrite" enabling the
|
|
|
|
user to write files to FAT.
|
2011-10-24 21:15:28 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-10-12 14:26:11 +00:00
|
|
|
CBFS (Coreboot Filesystem) support
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_CBFS
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this to enable support for reading from a Coreboot
|
|
|
|
filesystem. Available commands are cbfsinit, cbfsinfo, cbfsls
|
|
|
|
and cbfsload.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-05-26 13:48:37 +00:00
|
|
|
- FAT(File Allocation Table) filesystem cluster size:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_FS_FAT_MAX_CLUSTSIZE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define the max cluster size for fat operations else
|
|
|
|
a default value of 65536 will be defined.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Keyboard Support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_ISA_KEYBOARD
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this to enable standard (PC-Style) keyboard
|
|
|
|
support
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_I8042_KBD
|
|
|
|
Standard PC keyboard driver with US (is default) and
|
|
|
|
GERMAN key layout (switch via environment 'keymap=de') support.
|
|
|
|
Export function i8042_kbd_init, i8042_tstc and i8042_getc
|
|
|
|
for cfb_console. Supports cursor blinking.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-05-15 10:27:32 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CROS_EC_KEYB
|
|
|
|
Enables a Chrome OS keyboard using the CROS_EC interface.
|
|
|
|
This uses CROS_EC to communicate with a second microcontroller
|
|
|
|
which provides key scans on request.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Video support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_VIDEO
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this to enable video support (for output to
|
|
|
|
video).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_VIDEO_CT69000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enable Chips & Technologies 69000 Video chip
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_VIDEO_SMI_LYNXEM
|
2004-03-25 15:14:43 +00:00
|
|
|
Enable Silicon Motion SMI 712/710/810 Video chip. The
|
2004-03-23 22:53:55 +00:00
|
|
|
video output is selected via environment 'videoout'
|
|
|
|
(1 = LCD and 2 = CRT). If videoout is undefined, CRT is
|
|
|
|
assumed.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-03-25 15:14:43 +00:00
|
|
|
For the CT69000 and SMI_LYNXEM drivers, videomode is
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
selected via environment 'videomode'. Two different ways
|
2004-03-23 22:53:55 +00:00
|
|
|
are possible:
|
|
|
|
- "videomode=num" 'num' is a standard LiLo mode numbers.
|
2004-04-18 17:39:38 +00:00
|
|
|
Following standard modes are supported (* is default):
|
2004-03-23 22:53:55 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Colors 640x480 800x600 1024x768 1152x864 1280x1024
|
|
|
|
-------------+---------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
8 bits | 0x301* 0x303 0x305 0x161 0x307
|
|
|
|
15 bits | 0x310 0x313 0x316 0x162 0x319
|
|
|
|
16 bits | 0x311 0x314 0x317 0x163 0x31A
|
|
|
|
24 bits | 0x312 0x315 0x318 ? 0x31B
|
|
|
|
-------------+---------------------------------------------
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
(i.e. setenv videomode 317; saveenv; reset;)
|
|
|
|
|
2004-03-25 15:14:43 +00:00
|
|
|
- "videomode=bootargs" all the video parameters are parsed
|
2007-12-30 02:30:46 +00:00
|
|
|
from the bootargs. (See drivers/video/videomodes.c)
|
2004-03-23 22:53:55 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2003-04-04 15:53:41 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_VIDEO_SED13806
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Enable Epson SED13806 driver. This driver supports 8bpp
|
2002-12-03 21:28:10 +00:00
|
|
|
and 16bpp modes defined by CONFIG_VIDEO_SED13806_8BPP
|
|
|
|
or CONFIG_VIDEO_SED13806_16BPP
|
|
|
|
|
2011-02-15 23:09:19 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_FSL_DIU_FB
|
2011-09-11 19:24:09 +00:00
|
|
|
Enable the Freescale DIU video driver. Reference boards for
|
2011-02-15 23:09:19 +00:00
|
|
|
SOCs that have a DIU should define this macro to enable DIU
|
|
|
|
support, and should also define these other macros:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_DIU_ADDR
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_VIDEO
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_BMP
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CFB_CONSOLE
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_VIDEO_SW_CURSOR
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_VGA_AS_SINGLE_DEVICE
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_VIDEO_LOGO
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_LOGO
|
|
|
|
|
2011-04-11 19:18:22 +00:00
|
|
|
The DIU driver will look for the 'video-mode' environment
|
|
|
|
variable, and if defined, enable the DIU as a console during
|
|
|
|
boot. See the documentation file README.video for a
|
|
|
|
description of this variable.
|
2011-02-15 23:09:19 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-12-03 13:59:47 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_VIDEO_VGA
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enable the VGA video / BIOS for x86. The alternative if you
|
|
|
|
are using coreboot is to use the coreboot frame buffer
|
|
|
|
driver.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2003-06-03 23:54:09 +00:00
|
|
|
- Keyboard Support:
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_KEYBOARD
|
2003-06-03 23:54:09 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
Define this to enable a custom keyboard support.
|
|
|
|
This simply calls drv_keyboard_init() which must be
|
|
|
|
defined in your board-specific files.
|
|
|
|
The only board using this so far is RBC823.
|
2002-12-03 21:28:10 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- LCD Support: CONFIG_LCD
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this to enable LCD support (for output to LCD
|
|
|
|
display); also select one of the supported displays
|
|
|
|
by defining one of these:
|
|
|
|
|
2008-05-09 19:57:18 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_ATMEL_LCD:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
HITACHI TX09D70VM1CCA, 3.5", 240x320.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-11-25 16:55:19 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_NEC_NL6448AC33:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-11-25 16:55:19 +00:00
|
|
|
NEC NL6448AC33-18. Active, color, single scan.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-11-25 16:55:19 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_NEC_NL6448BC20
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-11-25 16:55:19 +00:00
|
|
|
NEC NL6448BC20-08. 6.5", 640x480.
|
|
|
|
Active, color, single scan.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_NEC_NL6448BC33_54
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NEC NL6448BC33-54. 10.4", 640x480.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Active, color, single scan.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SHARP_16x9
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sharp 320x240. Active, color, single scan.
|
|
|
|
It isn't 16x9, and I am not sure what it is.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SHARP_LQ64D341
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sharp LQ64D341 display, 640x480.
|
|
|
|
Active, color, single scan.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_HLD1045
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
HLD1045 display, 640x480.
|
|
|
|
Active, color, single scan.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_OPTREX_BW
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Optrex CBL50840-2 NF-FW 99 22 M5
|
|
|
|
or
|
|
|
|
Hitachi LMG6912RPFC-00T
|
|
|
|
or
|
|
|
|
Hitachi SP14Q002
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
320x240. Black & white.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Normally display is black on white background; define
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_WHITE_ON_BLACK to get it inverted.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-10-17 13:24:54 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_LCD_ALIGNMENT
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Normally the LCD is page-aligned (tyically 4KB). If this is
|
|
|
|
defined then the LCD will be aligned to this value instead.
|
|
|
|
For ARM it is sometimes useful to use MMU_SECTION_SIZE
|
|
|
|
here, since it is cheaper to change data cache settings on
|
|
|
|
a per-section basis.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-10-17 13:24:59 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CONSOLE_SCROLL_LINES
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When the console need to be scrolled, this is the number of
|
|
|
|
lines to scroll by. It defaults to 1. Increasing this makes
|
|
|
|
the console jump but can help speed up operation when scrolling
|
|
|
|
is slow.
|
2012-10-17 13:24:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-09-28 15:11:16 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_LCD_BMP_RLE8
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Support drawing of RLE8-compressed bitmaps on the LCD.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-12-05 14:46:40 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_I2C_EDID
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enables an 'i2c edid' command which can read EDID
|
|
|
|
information over I2C from an attached LCD display.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-09-05 23:19:14 +00:00
|
|
|
- Splash Screen Support: CONFIG_SPLASH_SCREEN
|
2003-04-20 14:04:18 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
If this option is set, the environment is checked for
|
|
|
|
a variable "splashimage". If found, the usual display
|
|
|
|
of logo, copyright and system information on the LCD
|
2004-06-30 22:59:18 +00:00
|
|
|
is suppressed and the BMP image at the address
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
specified in "splashimage" is loaded instead. The
|
|
|
|
console is redirected to the "nulldev", too. This
|
|
|
|
allows for a "silent" boot where a splash screen is
|
|
|
|
loaded very quickly after power-on.
|
2003-04-20 14:04:18 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2013-02-24 21:28:43 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPLASHIMAGE_GUARD
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If this option is set, then U-Boot will prevent the environment
|
|
|
|
variable "splashimage" from being set to a problematic address
|
2014-02-25 15:27:01 +00:00
|
|
|
(see README.displaying-bmps).
|
2013-02-24 21:28:43 +00:00
|
|
|
This option is useful for targets where, due to alignment
|
|
|
|
restrictions, an improperly aligned BMP image will cause a data
|
|
|
|
abort. If you think you will not have problems with unaligned
|
|
|
|
accesses (for example because your toolchain prevents them)
|
|
|
|
there is no need to set this option.
|
|
|
|
|
2009-07-09 14:07:30 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPLASH_SCREEN_ALIGN
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If this option is set the splash image can be freely positioned
|
|
|
|
on the screen. Environment variable "splashpos" specifies the
|
|
|
|
position as "x,y". If a positive number is given it is used as
|
|
|
|
number of pixel from left/top. If a negative number is given it
|
|
|
|
is used as number of pixel from right/bottom. You can also
|
|
|
|
specify 'm' for centering the image.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
setenv splashpos m,m
|
|
|
|
=> image at center of screen
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
setenv splashpos 30,20
|
|
|
|
=> image at x = 30 and y = 20
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
setenv splashpos -10,m
|
|
|
|
=> vertically centered image
|
|
|
|
at x = dspWidth - bmpWidth - 9
|
|
|
|
|
2005-09-22 07:04:17 +00:00
|
|
|
- Gzip compressed BMP image support: CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_GZIP
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If this option is set, additionally to standard BMP
|
|
|
|
images, gzipped BMP images can be displayed via the
|
|
|
|
splashscreen support or the bmp command.
|
|
|
|
|
2010-03-15 13:50:25 +00:00
|
|
|
- Run length encoded BMP image (RLE8) support: CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_RLE8
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If this option is set, 8-bit RLE compressed BMP images
|
|
|
|
can be displayed via the splashscreen support or the
|
|
|
|
bmp command.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-09-28 04:26:47 +00:00
|
|
|
- Do compresssing for memory range:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_ZIP
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If this option is set, it would use zlib deflate method
|
|
|
|
to compress the specified memory at its best effort.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-08-29 20:57:53 +00:00
|
|
|
- Compression support:
|
2013-08-16 14:59:12 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_GZIP
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enabled by default to support gzip compressed images.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-08-29 20:57:53 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_BZIP2
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If this option is set, support for bzip2 compressed
|
|
|
|
images is included. If not, only uncompressed and gzip
|
|
|
|
compressed images are supported.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-10-15 23:53:47 +00:00
|
|
|
NOTE: the bzip2 algorithm requires a lot of RAM, so
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
the malloc area (as defined by CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN) should
|
2003-10-15 23:53:47 +00:00
|
|
|
be at least 4MB.
|
2003-04-20 14:04:18 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-09-08 00:46:13 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_LZMA
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If this option is set, support for lzma compressed
|
|
|
|
images is included.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: The LZMA algorithm adds between 2 and 4KB of code and it
|
|
|
|
requires an amount of dynamic memory that is given by the
|
|
|
|
formula:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(1846 + 768 << (lc + lp)) * sizeof(uint16)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Where lc and lp stand for, respectively, Literal context bits
|
|
|
|
and Literal pos bits.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This value is upper-bounded by 14MB in the worst case. Anyway,
|
|
|
|
for a ~4MB large kernel image, we have lc=3 and lp=0 for a
|
|
|
|
total amount of (1846 + 768 << (3 + 0)) * 2 = ~41KB... that is
|
|
|
|
a very small buffer.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Use the lzmainfo tool to determinate the lc and lp values and
|
|
|
|
then calculate the amount of needed dynamic memory (ensuring
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
the appropriate CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN value).
|
2008-09-08 00:46:13 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2013-08-16 14:59:12 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_LZO
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If this option is set, support for LZO compressed images
|
|
|
|
is included.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-06-06 21:51:03 +00:00
|
|
|
- MII/PHY support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PHY_ADDR
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The address of PHY on MII bus.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PHY_CLOCK_FREQ (ppc4xx)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The clock frequency of the MII bus
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PHY_GIGE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If this option is set, support for speed/duplex
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
detection of gigabit PHY is included.
|
2004-06-06 21:51:03 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PHY_RESET_DELAY
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some PHY like Intel LXT971A need extra delay after
|
|
|
|
reset before any MII register access is possible.
|
|
|
|
For such PHY, set this option to the usec delay
|
|
|
|
required. (minimum 300usec for LXT971A)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PHY_CMD_DELAY (ppc4xx)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some PHY like Intel LXT971A need extra delay after
|
|
|
|
command issued before MII status register can be read
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Ethernet address:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_ETHADDR
|
2008-09-29 22:28:23 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_ETH1ADDR
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_ETH2ADDR
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_ETH3ADDR
|
2008-09-29 22:28:23 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_ETH4ADDR
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_ETH5ADDR
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
Define a default value for Ethernet address to use
|
|
|
|
for the respective Ethernet interface, in case this
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
is not determined automatically.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- IP address:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_IPADDR
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define a default value for the IP address to use for
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
the default Ethernet interface, in case this is not
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
determined through e.g. bootp.
|
2011-10-26 10:21:22 +00:00
|
|
|
(Environment variable "ipaddr")
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Server IP address:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SERVERIP
|
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
Defines a default value for the IP address of a TFTP
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
server to contact when using the "tftboot" command.
|
2011-10-26 10:21:22 +00:00
|
|
|
(Environment variable "serverip")
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2009-07-21 16:15:28 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_KEEP_SERVERADDR
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Keeps the server's MAC address, in the env 'serveraddr'
|
|
|
|
for passing to bootargs (like Linux's netconsole option)
|
|
|
|
|
2011-10-26 10:21:22 +00:00
|
|
|
- Gateway IP address:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_GATEWAYIP
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defines a default value for the IP address of the
|
|
|
|
default router where packets to other networks are
|
|
|
|
sent to.
|
|
|
|
(Environment variable "gatewayip")
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Subnet mask:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_NETMASK
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defines a default value for the subnet mask (or
|
|
|
|
routing prefix) which is used to determine if an IP
|
|
|
|
address belongs to the local subnet or needs to be
|
|
|
|
forwarded through a router.
|
|
|
|
(Environment variable "netmask")
|
|
|
|
|
2007-06-11 15:41:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Multicast TFTP Mode:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_MCAST_TFTP
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defines whether you want to support multicast TFTP as per
|
|
|
|
rfc-2090; for example to work with atftp. Lets lots of targets
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
tftp down the same boot image concurrently. Note: the Ethernet
|
2007-06-11 15:41:07 +00:00
|
|
|
driver in use must provide a function: mcast() to join/leave a
|
|
|
|
multicast group.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- BOOTP Recovery Mode:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_RANDOM_DELAY
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you have many targets in a network that try to
|
|
|
|
boot using BOOTP, you may want to avoid that all
|
|
|
|
systems send out BOOTP requests at precisely the same
|
|
|
|
moment (which would happen for instance at recovery
|
|
|
|
from a power failure, when all systems will try to
|
|
|
|
boot, thus flooding the BOOTP server. Defining
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_RANDOM_DELAY causes a random delay to be
|
|
|
|
inserted before sending out BOOTP requests. The
|
2007-08-06 21:21:05 +00:00
|
|
|
following delays are inserted then:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1st BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 1 sec
|
|
|
|
2nd BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 2 sec
|
|
|
|
3rd BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 4 sec
|
|
|
|
4th and following
|
|
|
|
BOOTP requests: delay 0 ... 8 sec
|
|
|
|
|
2014-08-19 08:21:24 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_ID_CACHE_SIZE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
BOOTP packets are uniquely identified using a 32-bit ID. The
|
|
|
|
server will copy the ID from client requests to responses and
|
|
|
|
U-Boot will use this to determine if it is the destination of
|
|
|
|
an incoming response. Some servers will check that addresses
|
|
|
|
aren't in use before handing them out (usually using an ARP
|
|
|
|
ping) and therefore take up to a few hundred milliseconds to
|
|
|
|
respond. Network congestion may also influence the time it
|
|
|
|
takes for a response to make it back to the client. If that
|
|
|
|
time is too long, U-Boot will retransmit requests. In order
|
|
|
|
to allow earlier responses to still be accepted after these
|
|
|
|
retransmissions, U-Boot's BOOTP client keeps a small cache of
|
|
|
|
IDs. The CONFIG_BOOTP_ID_CACHE_SIZE controls the size of this
|
|
|
|
cache. The default is to keep IDs for up to four outstanding
|
|
|
|
requests. Increasing this will allow U-Boot to accept offers
|
|
|
|
from a BOOTP client in networks with unusually high latency.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-08-28 14:17:32 +00:00
|
|
|
- DHCP Advanced Options:
|
2007-07-10 03:08:34 +00:00
|
|
|
You can fine tune the DHCP functionality by defining
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_* symbols:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_SUBNETMASK
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_GATEWAY
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_HOSTNAME
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_NISDOMAIN
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_BOOTPATH
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_BOOTFILESIZE
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS2
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_NTPSERVER
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_TIMEOFFSET
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_VENDOREX
|
2012-05-23 07:59:19 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL
|
2003-08-28 14:17:32 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2007-07-28 14:56:13 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_SERVERIP - TFTP server will be the serverip
|
|
|
|
environment variable, not the BOOTP server.
|
2003-08-28 14:17:32 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-05-23 07:59:19 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL - If the DHCP server is not found
|
|
|
|
after the configured retry count, the call will fail
|
|
|
|
instead of starting over. This can be used to fail over
|
|
|
|
to Link-local IP address configuration if the DHCP server
|
|
|
|
is not available.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-08-28 14:17:32 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS2 - If a DHCP client requests the DNS
|
|
|
|
serverip from a DHCP server, it is possible that more
|
|
|
|
than one DNS serverip is offered to the client.
|
|
|
|
If CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS2 is enabled, the secondary DNS
|
|
|
|
serverip will be stored in the additional environment
|
|
|
|
variable "dnsip2". The first DNS serverip is always
|
|
|
|
stored in the variable "dnsip", when CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS
|
2007-07-10 03:08:34 +00:00
|
|
|
is defined.
|
2003-08-28 14:17:32 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME - Some DHCP servers are capable
|
|
|
|
to do a dynamic update of a DNS server. To do this, they
|
|
|
|
need the hostname of the DHCP requester.
|
2007-07-28 14:56:13 +00:00
|
|
|
If CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME is defined, the content
|
2007-07-10 03:08:34 +00:00
|
|
|
of the "hostname" environment variable is passed as
|
|
|
|
option 12 to the DHCP server.
|
2003-08-28 14:17:32 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-03-25 22:43:57 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_DHCP_REQUEST_DELAY
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A 32bit value in microseconds for a delay between
|
|
|
|
receiving a "DHCP Offer" and sending the "DHCP Request".
|
|
|
|
This fixes a problem with certain DHCP servers that don't
|
|
|
|
respond 100% of the time to a "DHCP request". E.g. On an
|
|
|
|
AT91RM9200 processor running at 180MHz, this delay needed
|
|
|
|
to be *at least* 15,000 usec before a Windows Server 2003
|
|
|
|
DHCP server would reply 100% of the time. I recommend at
|
|
|
|
least 50,000 usec to be safe. The alternative is to hope
|
|
|
|
that one of the retries will be successful but note that
|
|
|
|
the DHCP timeout and retry process takes a longer than
|
|
|
|
this delay.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-05-23 08:00:12 +00:00
|
|
|
- Link-local IP address negotiation:
|
|
|
|
Negotiate with other link-local clients on the local network
|
|
|
|
for an address that doesn't require explicit configuration.
|
|
|
|
This is especially useful if a DHCP server cannot be guaranteed
|
|
|
|
to exist in all environments that the device must operate.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See doc/README.link-local for more information.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-04-15 21:48:45 +00:00
|
|
|
- CDP Options:
|
2004-04-18 17:39:38 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CDP_DEVICE_ID
|
2004-04-15 21:48:45 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The device id used in CDP trigger frames.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CDP_DEVICE_ID_PREFIX
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A two character string which is prefixed to the MAC address
|
|
|
|
of the device.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CDP_PORT_ID
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A printf format string which contains the ascii name of
|
|
|
|
the port. Normally is set to "eth%d" which sets
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
eth0 for the first Ethernet, eth1 for the second etc.
|
2004-04-15 21:48:45 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CDP_CAPABILITIES
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A 32bit integer which indicates the device capabilities;
|
|
|
|
0x00000010 for a normal host which does not forwards.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CDP_VERSION
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
An ascii string containing the version of the software.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CDP_PLATFORM
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
An ascii string containing the name of the platform.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CDP_TRIGGER
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A 32bit integer sent on the trigger.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CDP_POWER_CONSUMPTION
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A 16bit integer containing the power consumption of the
|
|
|
|
device in .1 of milliwatts.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CDP_APPLIANCE_VLAN_TYPE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A byte containing the id of the VLAN.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Status LED: CONFIG_STATUS_LED
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Several configurations allow to display the current
|
|
|
|
status using a LED. For instance, the LED will blink
|
|
|
|
fast while running U-Boot code, stop blinking as
|
|
|
|
soon as a reply to a BOOTP request was received, and
|
|
|
|
start blinking slow once the Linux kernel is running
|
|
|
|
(supported by a status LED driver in the Linux
|
|
|
|
kernel). Defining CONFIG_STATUS_LED enables this
|
|
|
|
feature in U-Boot.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-11-07 23:03:50 +00:00
|
|
|
Additional options:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_GPIO_LED
|
|
|
|
The status LED can be connected to a GPIO pin.
|
|
|
|
In such cases, the gpio_led driver can be used as a
|
|
|
|
status LED backend implementation. Define CONFIG_GPIO_LED
|
|
|
|
to include the gpio_led driver in the U-Boot binary.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-11-07 23:03:52 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_GPIO_LED_INVERTED_TABLE
|
|
|
|
Some GPIO connected LEDs may have inverted polarity in which
|
|
|
|
case the GPIO high value corresponds to LED off state and
|
|
|
|
GPIO low value corresponds to LED on state.
|
|
|
|
In such cases CONFIG_GPIO_LED_INVERTED_TABLE may be defined
|
|
|
|
with a list of GPIO LEDs that have inverted polarity.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- CAN Support: CONFIG_CAN_DRIVER
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defining CONFIG_CAN_DRIVER enables CAN driver support
|
|
|
|
on those systems that support this (optional)
|
|
|
|
feature, like the TQM8xxL modules.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-01-16 21:12:24 +00:00
|
|
|
- I2C Support: CONFIG_SYS_I2C
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This enable the NEW i2c subsystem, and will allow you to use
|
|
|
|
i2c commands at the u-boot command line (as long as you set
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_I2C in CONFIG_COMMANDS) and communicate with i2c
|
|
|
|
based realtime clock chips or other i2c devices. See
|
|
|
|
common/cmd_i2c.c for a description of the command line
|
|
|
|
interface.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ported i2c driver to the new framework:
|
2013-01-29 07:53:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- drivers/i2c/soft_i2c.c:
|
|
|
|
- activate first bus with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT define
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE
|
|
|
|
for defining speed and slave address
|
|
|
|
- activate second bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS2 define
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_2 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_2
|
|
|
|
for defining speed and slave address
|
|
|
|
- activate third bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS3 define
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_3 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_3
|
|
|
|
for defining speed and slave address
|
|
|
|
- activate fourth bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS4 define
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_4 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_4
|
|
|
|
for defining speed and slave address
|
2012-01-16 21:12:24 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-10-24 11:48:22 +00:00
|
|
|
- drivers/i2c/fsl_i2c.c:
|
|
|
|
- activate i2c driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_FSL
|
|
|
|
define CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_OFFSET for setting the register
|
|
|
|
offset CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_SPEED for the i2c speed and
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_SLAVE for the slave addr of the first
|
|
|
|
bus.
|
2013-10-04 15:43:24 +00:00
|
|
|
- If your board supports a second fsl i2c bus, define
|
2012-10-24 11:48:22 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_OFFSET for the register offset
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_SPEED for the speed and
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_SLAVE for the slave address of the
|
|
|
|
second bus.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-10-30 07:28:53 +00:00
|
|
|
- drivers/i2c/tegra_i2c.c:
|
2013-10-11 07:23:53 +00:00
|
|
|
- activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_TEGRA
|
|
|
|
- This driver adds 4 i2c buses with a fix speed from
|
|
|
|
100000 and the slave addr 0!
|
2012-10-30 07:28:53 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2013-04-25 02:40:01 +00:00
|
|
|
- drivers/i2c/ppc4xx_i2c.c
|
|
|
|
- activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX_CH0 activate hardware channel 0
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX_CH1 activate hardware channel 1
|
|
|
|
|
2013-09-21 16:13:35 +00:00
|
|
|
- drivers/i2c/i2c_mxc.c
|
|
|
|
- activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC
|
|
|
|
- define speed for bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C1_SPEED
|
|
|
|
- define slave for bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C1_SLAVE
|
|
|
|
- define speed for bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C2_SPEED
|
|
|
|
- define slave for bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C2_SLAVE
|
|
|
|
- define speed for bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C3_SPEED
|
|
|
|
- define slave for bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C3_SLAVE
|
|
|
|
If thoses defines are not set, default value is 100000
|
|
|
|
for speed, and 0 for slave.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-09-27 07:58:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- drivers/i2c/rcar_i2c.c:
|
|
|
|
- activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_RCAR
|
|
|
|
- This driver adds 4 i2c buses
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C0_BASE for setting the register channel 0
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C0_SPEED for for the speed channel 0
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C1_BASE for setting the register channel 1
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C1_SPEED for for the speed channel 1
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C2_BASE for setting the register channel 2
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C2_SPEED for for the speed channel 2
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C3_BASE for setting the register channel 3
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C3_SPEED for for the speed channel 3
|
|
|
|
- CONFIF_SYS_RCAR_I2C_NUM_CONTROLLERS for number of i2c buses
|
|
|
|
|
2013-10-29 04:33:51 +00:00
|
|
|
- drivers/i2c/sh_i2c.c:
|
|
|
|
- activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH
|
|
|
|
- This driver adds from 2 to 5 i2c buses
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE0 for setting the register channel 0
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED0 for for the speed channel 0
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE1 for setting the register channel 1
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED1 for for the speed channel 1
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE2 for setting the register channel 2
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED2 for for the speed channel 2
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE3 for setting the register channel 3
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED3 for for the speed channel 3
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE4 for setting the register channel 4
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED4 for for the speed channel 4
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE5 for setting the register channel 5
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED5 for for the speed channel 5
|
|
|
|
- CONFIF_SYS_I2C_SH_NUM_CONTROLLERS for nummber of i2c buses
|
|
|
|
|
2013-10-22 09:03:18 +00:00
|
|
|
- drivers/i2c/omap24xx_i2c.c
|
|
|
|
- activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_OMAP24XX
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED speed channel 0
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE slave addr channel 0
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED1 speed channel 1
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE1 slave addr channel 1
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED2 speed channel 2
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE2 slave addr channel 2
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED3 speed channel 3
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE3 slave addr channel 3
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED4 speed channel 4
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE4 slave addr channel 4
|
|
|
|
|
2013-11-08 06:30:53 +00:00
|
|
|
- drivers/i2c/zynq_i2c.c
|
|
|
|
- activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ
|
|
|
|
- set CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ_SPEED for speed setting
|
|
|
|
- set CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ_SLAVE for slave addr
|
|
|
|
|
2013-12-06 06:42:38 +00:00
|
|
|
- drivers/i2c/s3c24x0_i2c.c:
|
|
|
|
- activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_S3C24X0
|
|
|
|
- This driver adds i2c buses (11 for Exynos5250, Exynos5420
|
|
|
|
9 i2c buses for Exynos4 and 1 for S3C24X0 SoCs from Samsung)
|
|
|
|
with a fix speed from 100000 and the slave addr 0!
|
|
|
|
|
2014-07-03 07:28:18 +00:00
|
|
|
- drivers/i2c/ihs_i2c.c
|
|
|
|
- activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH0 activate hardware channel 0
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_0 speed channel 0
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_0 slave addr channel 0
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH1 activate hardware channel 1
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_1 speed channel 1
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_1 slave addr channel 1
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH2 activate hardware channel 2
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_2 speed channel 2
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_2 slave addr channel 2
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH3 activate hardware channel 3
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_3 speed channel 3
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_3 slave addr channel 3
|
|
|
|
|
2012-01-16 21:12:24 +00:00
|
|
|
additional defines:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_BUSES
|
|
|
|
Hold the number of i2c busses you want to use. If you
|
|
|
|
don't use/have i2c muxes on your i2c bus, this
|
|
|
|
is equal to CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_ADAPTERS, and you can
|
|
|
|
omit this define.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DIRECT_BUS
|
|
|
|
define this, if you don't use i2c muxes on your hardware.
|
|
|
|
if CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS is not defined or == 0 you can
|
|
|
|
omit this define.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS
|
|
|
|
define how many muxes are maximal consecutively connected
|
|
|
|
on one i2c bus. If you not use i2c muxes, omit this
|
|
|
|
define.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BUSES
|
|
|
|
hold a list of busses you want to use, only used if
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DIRECT_BUS is not defined, for example
|
|
|
|
a board with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS = 1 and
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_BUSES = 9:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BUSES {{0, {I2C_NULL_HOP}}, \
|
|
|
|
{0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 1}}}, \
|
|
|
|
{0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 2}}}, \
|
|
|
|
{0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 3}}}, \
|
|
|
|
{0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 4}}}, \
|
|
|
|
{0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 5}}}, \
|
|
|
|
{1, {I2C_NULL_HOP}}, \
|
|
|
|
{1, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9544, 0x72, 1}}}, \
|
|
|
|
{1, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9544, 0x72, 2}}}, \
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
which defines
|
|
|
|
bus 0 on adapter 0 without a mux
|
2013-01-29 07:53:15 +00:00
|
|
|
bus 1 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 1
|
|
|
|
bus 2 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 2
|
|
|
|
bus 3 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 3
|
|
|
|
bus 4 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 4
|
|
|
|
bus 5 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 5
|
2012-01-16 21:12:24 +00:00
|
|
|
bus 6 on adapter 1 without a mux
|
2013-01-29 07:53:15 +00:00
|
|
|
bus 7 on adapter 1 with a PCA9544 on address 0x72 port 1
|
|
|
|
bus 8 on adapter 1 with a PCA9544 on address 0x72 port 2
|
2012-01-16 21:12:24 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you do not have i2c muxes on your board, omit this define.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-01-29 07:53:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- Legacy I2C Support: CONFIG_HARD_I2C
|
2012-01-16 21:12:24 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NOTE: It is intended to move drivers to CONFIG_SYS_I2C which
|
|
|
|
provides the following compelling advantages:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- more than one i2c adapter is usable
|
|
|
|
- approved multibus support
|
|
|
|
- better i2c mux support
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
** Please consider updating your I2C driver now. **
|
|
|
|
|
2013-01-29 07:53:15 +00:00
|
|
|
These enable legacy I2C serial bus commands. Defining
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_HARD_I2C will include the appropriate I2C driver
|
|
|
|
for the selected CPU.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-07-16 21:53:01 +00:00
|
|
|
This will allow you to use i2c commands at the u-boot
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
command line (as long as you set CONFIG_CMD_I2C in
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_COMMANDS) and communicate with i2c based realtime
|
|
|
|
clock chips. See common/cmd_i2c.c for a description of the
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
command line interface.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2006-09-07 20:50:54 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_HARD_I2C selects a hardware I2C controller.
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-07-16 21:53:01 +00:00
|
|
|
There are several other quantities that must also be
|
2013-01-29 07:53:15 +00:00
|
|
|
defined when you define CONFIG_HARD_I2C.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
In both cases you will need to define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SPEED
|
2003-07-16 21:53:01 +00:00
|
|
|
to be the frequency (in Hz) at which you wish your i2c bus
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
to run and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SLAVE to be the address of this node (ie
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
the CPU's i2c node address).
|
2003-07-16 21:53:01 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2010-04-13 03:28:21 +00:00
|
|
|
Now, the u-boot i2c code for the mpc8xx
|
2010-04-15 14:07:28 +00:00
|
|
|
(arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/i2c.c) sets the CPU up as a master node
|
2010-04-13 03:28:21 +00:00
|
|
|
and so its address should therefore be cleared to 0 (See,
|
|
|
|
eg, MPC823e User's Manual p.16-473). So, set
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SLAVE to 0.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2009-09-03 13:09:44 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_INIT_MPC5XXX
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When a board is reset during an i2c bus transfer
|
|
|
|
chips might think that the current transfer is still
|
|
|
|
in progress. Reset the slave devices by sending start
|
|
|
|
commands until the slave device responds.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-07-16 21:53:01 +00:00
|
|
|
That's all that's required for CONFIG_HARD_I2C.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2013-01-29 07:53:15 +00:00
|
|
|
If you use the software i2c interface (CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT)
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
then the following macros need to be defined (examples are
|
|
|
|
from include/configs/lwmon.h):
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
I2C_INIT
|
|
|
|
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
(Optional). Any commands necessary to enable the I2C
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
controller or configure ports.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-02-06 23:19:44 +00:00
|
|
|
eg: #define I2C_INIT (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir |= PB_SCL)
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
I2C_PORT
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
(Only for MPC8260 CPU). The I/O port to use (the code
|
|
|
|
assumes both bits are on the same port). Valid values
|
|
|
|
are 0..3 for ports A..D.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
I2C_ACTIVE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The code necessary to make the I2C data line active
|
|
|
|
(driven). If the data line is open collector, this
|
|
|
|
define can be null.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
eg: #define I2C_ACTIVE (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir |= PB_SDA)
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
I2C_TRISTATE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The code necessary to make the I2C data line tri-stated
|
|
|
|
(inactive). If the data line is open collector, this
|
|
|
|
define can be null.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
eg: #define I2C_TRISTATE (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir &= ~PB_SDA)
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
I2C_READ
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-01 18:29:11 +00:00
|
|
|
Code that returns true if the I2C data line is high,
|
|
|
|
false if it is low.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
eg: #define I2C_READ ((immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat & PB_SDA) != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
I2C_SDA(bit)
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-01 18:29:11 +00:00
|
|
|
If <bit> is true, sets the I2C data line high. If it
|
|
|
|
is false, it clears it (low).
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
eg: #define I2C_SDA(bit) \
|
2003-07-17 23:16:40 +00:00
|
|
|
if(bit) immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat |= PB_SDA; \
|
2004-02-06 23:19:44 +00:00
|
|
|
else immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat &= ~PB_SDA
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
I2C_SCL(bit)
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-01 18:29:11 +00:00
|
|
|
If <bit> is true, sets the I2C clock line high. If it
|
|
|
|
is false, it clears it (low).
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
eg: #define I2C_SCL(bit) \
|
2003-07-17 23:16:40 +00:00
|
|
|
if(bit) immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat |= PB_SCL; \
|
2004-02-06 23:19:44 +00:00
|
|
|
else immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat &= ~PB_SCL
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
I2C_DELAY
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This delay is invoked four times per clock cycle so this
|
|
|
|
controls the rate of data transfer. The data rate thus
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
is 1 / (I2C_DELAY * 4). Often defined to be something
|
2003-07-16 21:53:01 +00:00
|
|
|
like:
|
|
|
|
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
#define I2C_DELAY udelay(2)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2010-07-21 17:38:02 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_GPIO_SCL / CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_GPIO_SDA
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If your arch supports the generic GPIO framework (asm/gpio.h),
|
|
|
|
then you may alternatively define the two GPIOs that are to be
|
|
|
|
used as SCL / SDA. Any of the previous I2C_xxx macros will
|
|
|
|
have GPIO-based defaults assigned to them as appropriate.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You should define these to the GPIO value as given directly to
|
|
|
|
the generic GPIO functions.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_INIT_BOARD
|
2003-03-06 13:39:27 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
When a board is reset during an i2c bus transfer
|
|
|
|
chips might think that the current transfer is still
|
|
|
|
in progress. On some boards it is possible to access
|
|
|
|
the i2c SCLK line directly, either by using the
|
|
|
|
processor pin as a GPIO or by having a second pin
|
|
|
|
connected to the bus. If this option is defined a
|
|
|
|
custom i2c_init_board() routine in boards/xxx/board.c
|
|
|
|
is run early in the boot sequence.
|
2003-03-06 13:39:27 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2010-04-12 19:08:17 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BOARD_LATE_INIT
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
An alternative to CONFIG_SYS_I2C_INIT_BOARD. If this option is
|
|
|
|
defined a custom i2c_board_late_init() routine in
|
|
|
|
boards/xxx/board.c is run AFTER the operations in i2c_init()
|
|
|
|
is completed. This callpoint can be used to unreset i2c bus
|
|
|
|
using CPU i2c controller register accesses for CPUs whose i2c
|
|
|
|
controller provide such a method. It is called at the end of
|
|
|
|
i2c_init() to allow i2c_init operations to setup the i2c bus
|
|
|
|
controller on the CPU (e.g. setting bus speed & slave address).
|
|
|
|
|
2004-06-06 21:51:03 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_I2CFAST (PPC405GP|PPC405EP only)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This option enables configuration of bi_iic_fast[] flags
|
|
|
|
in u-boot bd_info structure based on u-boot environment
|
|
|
|
variable "i2cfast". (see also i2cfast)
|
|
|
|
|
2006-09-07 20:50:54 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This option allows the use of multiple I2C buses, each of which
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
must have a controller. At any point in time, only one bus is
|
|
|
|
active. To switch to a different bus, use the 'i2c dev' command.
|
2006-09-07 20:50:54 +00:00
|
|
|
Note that bus numbering is zero-based.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES
|
2006-09-07 20:50:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This option specifies a list of I2C devices that will be skipped
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
when the 'i2c probe' command is issued. If CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
|
2009-04-19 03:34:03 +00:00
|
|
|
is set, specify a list of bus-device pairs. Otherwise, specify
|
|
|
|
a 1D array of device addresses
|
2006-09-07 20:50:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
e.g.
|
|
|
|
#undef CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
#define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES {0x50,0x68}
|
2006-09-07 20:50:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
will skip addresses 0x50 and 0x68 on a board with one I2C bus
|
|
|
|
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
#define CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
#define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MULTI_NOPROBES {{0,0x50},{0,0x68},{1,0x54}}
|
2006-09-07 20:50:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
will skip addresses 0x50 and 0x68 on bus 0 and address 0x54 on bus 1
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_SPD_BUS_NUM
|
2006-11-04 01:15:00 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for DDR SPD.
|
|
|
|
If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that SPD is on I2C bus 0.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_RTC_BUS_NUM
|
2007-02-20 09:51:26 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for the RTC.
|
|
|
|
If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that RTC is on I2C bus 0.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_DTT_BUS_NUM
|
2007-02-20 09:51:26 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for the DTT.
|
|
|
|
If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that DTT is on I2C bus 0.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DTT_ADDR:
|
2008-09-09 22:13:29 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If defined, specifies the I2C address of the DTT device.
|
|
|
|
If not defined, then U-Boot uses predefined value for
|
|
|
|
specified DTT device.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-12-29 23:36:01 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_READ_REPEATED_START
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
defining this will force the i2c_read() function in
|
|
|
|
the soft_i2c driver to perform an I2C repeated start
|
|
|
|
between writing the address pointer and reading the
|
|
|
|
data. If this define is omitted the default behaviour
|
|
|
|
of doing a stop-start sequence will be used. Most I2C
|
|
|
|
devices can use either method, but some require one or
|
|
|
|
the other.
|
2006-11-04 01:15:00 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- SPI Support: CONFIG_SPI
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enables SPI driver (so far only tested with
|
|
|
|
SPI EEPROM, also an instance works with Crystal A/D and
|
|
|
|
D/As on the SACSng board)
|
|
|
|
|
2011-01-31 07:50:43 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SH_SPI
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enables the driver for SPI controller on SuperH. Currently
|
|
|
|
only SH7757 is supported.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPI_X
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enables extended (16-bit) SPI EEPROM addressing.
|
|
|
|
(symmetrical to CONFIG_I2C_X)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SOFT_SPI
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Enables a software (bit-bang) SPI driver rather than
|
|
|
|
using hardware support. This is a general purpose
|
|
|
|
driver that only requires three general I/O port pins
|
|
|
|
(two outputs, one input) to function. If this is
|
|
|
|
defined, the board configuration must define several
|
|
|
|
SPI configuration items (port pins to use, etc). For
|
|
|
|
an example, see include/configs/sacsng.h.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-01-17 03:37:35 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_HARD_SPI
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enables a hardware SPI driver for general-purpose reads
|
|
|
|
and writes. As with CONFIG_SOFT_SPI, the board configuration
|
|
|
|
must define a list of chip-select function pointers.
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
Currently supported on some MPC8xxx processors. For an
|
2008-01-17 03:37:35 +00:00
|
|
|
example, see include/configs/mpc8349emds.h.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-04-15 12:14:25 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_MXC_SPI
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enables the driver for the SPI controllers on i.MX and MXC
|
2011-10-28 08:57:46 +00:00
|
|
|
SoCs. Currently i.MX31/35/51 are supported.
|
2008-04-15 12:14:25 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-07-14 08:22:11 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_SPI_MXC_WAIT
|
|
|
|
Timeout for waiting until spi transfer completed.
|
|
|
|
default: (CONFIG_SYS_HZ/100) /* 10 ms */
|
|
|
|
|
2007-12-27 16:12:34 +00:00
|
|
|
- FPGA Support: CONFIG_FPGA
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2007-12-27 16:12:34 +00:00
|
|
|
Enables FPGA subsystem.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_FPGA_<vendor>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enables support for specific chip vendors.
|
|
|
|
(ALTERA, XILINX)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2007-12-27 16:12:34 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_FPGA_<family>
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2007-12-27 16:12:34 +00:00
|
|
|
Enables support for FPGA family.
|
|
|
|
(SPARTAN2, SPARTAN3, VIRTEX2, CYCLONE2, ACEX1K, ACEX)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_FPGA_COUNT
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Specify the number of FPGA devices to support.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-03-14 11:05:38 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_FPGA_LOADMK
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enable support for fpga loadmk command
|
|
|
|
|
2014-05-02 11:43:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_FPGA_LOADP
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enable support for fpga loadp command - load partial bitstream
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_FPGA_LOADBP
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enable support for fpga loadbp command - load partial bitstream
|
|
|
|
(Xilinx only)
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_PROG_FEEDBACK
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
Enable printing of hash marks during FPGA configuration.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_BUSY
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Enable checks on FPGA configuration interface busy
|
|
|
|
status by the configuration function. This option
|
|
|
|
will require a board or device specific function to
|
|
|
|
be written.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_FPGA_DELAY
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If defined, a function that provides delays in the FPGA
|
|
|
|
configuration driver.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_CTRLC
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Allow Control-C to interrupt FPGA configuration
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_ERROR
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Check for configuration errors during FPGA bitfile
|
|
|
|
loading. For example, abort during Virtex II
|
|
|
|
configuration if the INIT_B line goes low (which
|
|
|
|
indicated a CRC error).
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_INIT
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Maximum time to wait for the INIT_B line to deassert
|
|
|
|
after PROB_B has been deasserted during a Virtex II
|
|
|
|
FPGA configuration sequence. The default time is 500
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
ms.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_BUSY
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Maximum time to wait for BUSY to deassert during
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
Virtex II FPGA configuration. The default is 5 ms.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_CONFIG
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Time to wait after FPGA configuration. The default is
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
200 ms.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Configuration Management:
|
2014-10-22 10:13:24 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_BUILD_TARGET
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some SoCs need special image types (e.g. U-Boot binary
|
|
|
|
with a special header) as build targets. By defining
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BUILD_TARGET in the SoC / board header, this
|
|
|
|
special image will be automatically built upon calling
|
|
|
|
make / MAKEALL.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_IDENT_STRING
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
If defined, this string will be added to the U-Boot
|
|
|
|
version information (U_BOOT_VERSION)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Vendor Parameter Protection:
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot considers the values of the environment
|
|
|
|
variables "serial#" (Board Serial Number) and
|
2003-09-05 23:19:14 +00:00
|
|
|
"ethaddr" (Ethernet Address) to be parameters that
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
are set once by the board vendor / manufacturer, and
|
|
|
|
protects these variables from casual modification by
|
|
|
|
the user. Once set, these variables are read-only,
|
|
|
|
and write or delete attempts are rejected. You can
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
change this behaviour:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If CONFIG_ENV_OVERWRITE is #defined in your config
|
|
|
|
file, the write protection for vendor parameters is
|
2003-03-06 13:39:27 +00:00
|
|
|
completely disabled. Anybody can change or delete
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
these parameters.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Alternatively, if you #define _both_ CONFIG_ETHADDR
|
|
|
|
_and_ CONFIG_OVERWRITE_ETHADDR_ONCE, a default
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
Ethernet address is installed in the environment,
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
which can be changed exactly ONCE by the user. [The
|
|
|
|
serial# is unaffected by this, i. e. it remains
|
|
|
|
read-only.]
|
|
|
|
|
2012-12-12 04:16:31 +00:00
|
|
|
The same can be accomplished in a more flexible way
|
|
|
|
for any variable by configuring the type of access
|
|
|
|
to allow for those variables in the ".flags" variable
|
|
|
|
or define CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Protected RAM:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PRAM
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this variable to enable the reservation of
|
|
|
|
"protected RAM", i. e. RAM which is not overwritten
|
|
|
|
by U-Boot. Define CONFIG_PRAM to hold the number of
|
|
|
|
kB you want to reserve for pRAM. You can overwrite
|
|
|
|
this default value by defining an environment
|
|
|
|
variable "pram" to the number of kB you want to
|
|
|
|
reserve. Note that the board info structure will
|
|
|
|
still show the full amount of RAM. If pRAM is
|
|
|
|
reserved, a new environment variable "mem" will
|
|
|
|
automatically be defined to hold the amount of
|
|
|
|
remaining RAM in a form that can be passed as boot
|
|
|
|
argument to Linux, for instance like that:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-11-20 20:40:11 +00:00
|
|
|
setenv bootargs ... mem=\${mem}
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
saveenv
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This way you can tell Linux not to use this memory,
|
|
|
|
either, which results in a memory region that will
|
|
|
|
not be affected by reboots.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*WARNING* If your board configuration uses automatic
|
|
|
|
detection of the RAM size, you must make sure that
|
|
|
|
this memory test is non-destructive. So far, the
|
|
|
|
following board configurations are known to be
|
|
|
|
"pRAM-clean":
|
|
|
|
|
2012-10-24 02:36:15 +00:00
|
|
|
IVMS8, IVML24, SPD8xx, TQM8xxL,
|
|
|
|
HERMES, IP860, RPXlite, LWMON,
|
2010-10-05 20:54:53 +00:00
|
|
|
FLAGADM, TQM8260
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-12-02 04:55:18 +00:00
|
|
|
- Access to physical memory region (> 4GB)
|
|
|
|
Some basic support is provided for operations on memory not
|
|
|
|
normally accessible to U-Boot - e.g. some architectures
|
|
|
|
support access to more than 4GB of memory on 32-bit
|
|
|
|
machines using physical address extension or similar.
|
|
|
|
Define CONFIG_PHYSMEM to access this basic support, which
|
|
|
|
currently only supports clearing the memory.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Error Recovery:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PANIC_HANG
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this variable to stop the system in case of a
|
|
|
|
fatal error, so that you have to reset it manually.
|
|
|
|
This is probably NOT a good idea for an embedded
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
system where you want the system to reboot
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
automatically as fast as possible, but it may be
|
|
|
|
useful during development since you can try to debug
|
|
|
|
the conditions that lead to the situation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
This variable defines the number of retries for
|
|
|
|
network operations like ARP, RARP, TFTP, or BOOTP
|
|
|
|
before giving up the operation. If not defined, a
|
|
|
|
default value of 5 is used.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-04-03 15:04:19 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_ARP_TIMEOUT
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Timeout waiting for an ARP reply in milliseconds.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-07-03 22:25:21 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_NFS_TIMEOUT
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Timeout in milliseconds used in NFS protocol.
|
|
|
|
If you encounter "ERROR: Cannot umount" in nfs command,
|
|
|
|
try longer timeout such as
|
|
|
|
#define CONFIG_NFS_TIMEOUT 10000UL
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Command Interpreter:
|
2006-10-28 00:28:02 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_AUTO_COMPLETE
|
2004-04-15 18:22:41 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enable auto completion of commands using TAB.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_HUSH_PARSER
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this variable to enable the "hush" shell (from
|
|
|
|
Busybox) as command line interpreter, thus enabling
|
|
|
|
powerful command line syntax like
|
|
|
|
if...then...else...fi conditionals or `&&' and '||'
|
|
|
|
constructs ("shell scripts").
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If undefined, you get the old, much simpler behaviour
|
|
|
|
with a somewhat smaller memory footprint.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_PROMPT_HUSH_PS2
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This defines the secondary prompt string, which is
|
|
|
|
printed when the command interpreter needs more input
|
|
|
|
to complete a command. Usually "> ".
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note:
|
|
|
|
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
In the current implementation, the local variables
|
|
|
|
space and global environment variables space are
|
|
|
|
separated. Local variables are those you define by
|
|
|
|
simply typing `name=value'. To access a local
|
|
|
|
variable later on, you have write `$name' or
|
|
|
|
`${name}'; to execute the contents of a variable
|
|
|
|
directly type `$name' at the command prompt.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Global environment variables are those you use
|
|
|
|
setenv/printenv to work with. To run a command stored
|
|
|
|
in such a variable, you need to use the run command,
|
|
|
|
and you must not use the '$' sign to access them.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To store commands and special characters in a
|
|
|
|
variable, please use double quotation marks
|
|
|
|
surrounding the whole text of the variable, instead
|
|
|
|
of the backslashes before semicolons and special
|
|
|
|
symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
2006-07-21 09:35:21 +00:00
|
|
|
- Commandline Editing and History:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMDLINE_EDITING
|
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
Enable editing and History functions for interactive
|
2006-07-21 09:56:05 +00:00
|
|
|
commandline input operations
|
2006-07-21 09:35:21 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-12-06 19:49:23 +00:00
|
|
|
- Default Environment:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Define this to contain any number of null terminated
|
|
|
|
strings (variable = value pairs) that will be part of
|
2003-09-05 23:19:14 +00:00
|
|
|
the default environment compiled into the boot image.
|
2002-11-18 00:14:45 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
For example, place something like this in your
|
|
|
|
board's config file:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS \
|
|
|
|
"myvar1=value1\0" \
|
|
|
|
"myvar2=value2\0"
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Warning: This method is based on knowledge about the
|
|
|
|
internal format how the environment is stored by the
|
|
|
|
U-Boot code. This is NOT an official, exported
|
|
|
|
interface! Although it is unlikely that this format
|
2003-09-05 23:19:14 +00:00
|
|
|
will change soon, there is no guarantee either.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
You better know what you are doing here.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Note: overly (ab)use of the default environment is
|
|
|
|
discouraged. Make sure to check other ways to preset
|
2009-04-01 21:34:12 +00:00
|
|
|
the environment like the "source" command or the
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
boot command first.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-05-22 09:21:54 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_ENV_VARS_UBOOT_CONFIG
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this in order to add variables describing the
|
|
|
|
U-Boot build configuration to the default environment.
|
|
|
|
These will be named arch, cpu, board, vendor, and soc.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enabling this option will cause the following to be defined:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_ARCH
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CPU
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_BOARD
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_VENDOR
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SOC
|
|
|
|
|
2012-10-24 07:28:16 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_ENV_VARS_UBOOT_RUNTIME_CONFIG
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this in order to add variables describing certain
|
|
|
|
run-time determined information about the hardware to the
|
|
|
|
environment. These will be named board_name, board_rev.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-11-30 13:01:17 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_DELAY_ENVIRONMENT
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Normally the environment is loaded when the board is
|
|
|
|
intialised so that it is available to U-Boot. This inhibits
|
|
|
|
that so that the environment is not available until
|
|
|
|
explicitly loaded later by U-Boot code. With CONFIG_OF_CONTROL
|
|
|
|
this is instead controlled by the value of
|
|
|
|
/config/load-environment.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-12-06 19:49:23 +00:00
|
|
|
- DataFlash Support:
|
2003-06-16 23:50:08 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_HAS_DATAFLASH
|
|
|
|
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
Defining this option enables DataFlash features and
|
|
|
|
allows to read/write in Dataflash via the standard
|
|
|
|
commands cp, md...
|
2003-06-16 23:50:08 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-01-31 17:52:08 +00:00
|
|
|
- Serial Flash support
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_SF
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defining this option enables SPI flash commands
|
|
|
|
'sf probe/read/write/erase/update'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Usage requires an initial 'probe' to define the serial
|
|
|
|
flash parameters, followed by read/write/erase/update
|
|
|
|
commands.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following defaults may be provided by the platform
|
|
|
|
to handle the common case when only a single serial
|
|
|
|
flash is present on the system.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_BUS Bus identifier
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_CS Chip-select
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_MODE (see include/spi.h)
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_SPEED in Hz
|
|
|
|
|
2012-10-08 13:16:02 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_SF_TEST
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this option to include a destructive SPI flash
|
|
|
|
test ('sf test').
|
|
|
|
|
2013-06-19 10:03:58 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_BAR Ban/Extended Addr Reg
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this option to use the Bank addr/Extended addr
|
|
|
|
support on SPI flashes which has size > 16Mbytes.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-01-11 09:55:04 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SF_DUAL_FLASH Dual flash memories
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this option to use dual flash support where two flash
|
|
|
|
memories can be connected with a given cs line.
|
|
|
|
currently Xilinx Zynq qspi support these type of connections.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-07-18 04:07:21 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_SPI_ST_ENABLE_WP_PIN
|
|
|
|
enable the W#/Vpp signal to disable writing to the status
|
|
|
|
register on ST MICRON flashes like the N25Q128.
|
|
|
|
The status register write enable/disable bit, combined with
|
|
|
|
the W#/VPP signal provides hardware data protection for the
|
|
|
|
device as follows: When the enable/disable bit is set to 1,
|
|
|
|
and the W#/VPP signal is driven LOW, the status register
|
|
|
|
nonvolatile bits become read-only and the WRITE STATUS REGISTER
|
|
|
|
operation will not execute. The only way to exit this
|
|
|
|
hardware-protected mode is to drive W#/VPP HIGH.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-02-23 16:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- SystemACE Support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYSTEMACE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Adding this option adds support for Xilinx SystemACE
|
|
|
|
chips attached via some sort of local bus. The address
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
of the chip must also be defined in the
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_SYSTEMACE_BASE macro. For example:
|
2004-02-23 16:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define CONFIG_SYSTEMACE
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
#define CONFIG_SYS_SYSTEMACE_BASE 0xf0000000
|
2004-02-23 16:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When SystemACE support is added, the "ace" device type
|
|
|
|
becomes available to the fat commands, i.e. fatls.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-09-24 20:37:32 +00:00
|
|
|
- TFTP Fixed UDP Port:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_TFTP_PORT
|
|
|
|
|
2005-09-24 21:25:46 +00:00
|
|
|
If this is defined, the environment variable tftpsrcp
|
2005-09-24 20:37:32 +00:00
|
|
|
is used to supply the TFTP UDP source port value.
|
2005-09-24 21:25:46 +00:00
|
|
|
If tftpsrcp isn't defined, the normal pseudo-random port
|
2005-09-24 20:37:32 +00:00
|
|
|
number generator is used.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-09-24 21:25:46 +00:00
|
|
|
Also, the environment variable tftpdstp is used to supply
|
|
|
|
the TFTP UDP destination port value. If tftpdstp isn't
|
|
|
|
defined, the normal port 69 is used.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The purpose for tftpsrcp is to allow a TFTP server to
|
2005-09-24 20:37:32 +00:00
|
|
|
blindly start the TFTP transfer using the pre-configured
|
|
|
|
target IP address and UDP port. This has the effect of
|
|
|
|
"punching through" the (Windows XP) firewall, allowing
|
|
|
|
the remainder of the TFTP transfer to proceed normally.
|
|
|
|
A better solution is to properly configure the firewall,
|
|
|
|
but sometimes that is not allowed.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-12-05 14:46:38 +00:00
|
|
|
- Hashing support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_HASH
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This enables a generic 'hash' command which can produce
|
|
|
|
hashes / digests from a few algorithms (e.g. SHA1, SHA256).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_HASH_VERIFY
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enable the hash verify command (hash -v). This adds to code
|
|
|
|
size a little.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SHA1 - support SHA1 hashing
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SHA256 - support SHA256 hashing
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: There is also a sha1sum command, which should perhaps
|
|
|
|
be deprecated in favour of 'hash sha1'.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-07-25 00:57:06 +00:00
|
|
|
- Freescale i.MX specific commands:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_HDMIDETECT
|
|
|
|
This enables 'hdmidet' command which returns true if an
|
|
|
|
HDMI monitor is detected. This command is i.MX 6 specific.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_BMODE
|
|
|
|
This enables the 'bmode' (bootmode) command for forcing
|
|
|
|
a boot from specific media.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is useful for forcing the ROM's usb downloader to
|
|
|
|
activate upon a watchdog reset which is nice when iterating
|
|
|
|
on U-Boot. Using the reset button or running bmode normal
|
|
|
|
will set it back to normal. This command currently
|
|
|
|
supports i.MX53 and i.MX6.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-06-13 22:10:02 +00:00
|
|
|
- Signing support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_RSA
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This enables the RSA algorithm used for FIT image verification
|
2014-01-20 15:21:46 +00:00
|
|
|
in U-Boot. See doc/uImage.FIT/signature.txt for more information.
|
2013-06-13 22:10:02 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The signing part is build into mkimage regardless of this
|
|
|
|
option.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-01-25 06:27:13 +00:00
|
|
|
- bootcount support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_LIMIT
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This enables the bootcounter support, see:
|
|
|
|
http://www.denx.de/wiki/DULG/UBootBootCountLimit
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_AT91SAM9XE
|
|
|
|
enable special bootcounter support on at91sam9xe based boards.
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BLACKFIN
|
|
|
|
enable special bootcounter support on blackfin based boards.
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SOC_DA8XX
|
|
|
|
enable special bootcounter support on da850 based boards.
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_RAM
|
|
|
|
enable support for the bootcounter in RAM
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_I2C
|
|
|
|
enable support for the bootcounter on an i2c (like RTC) device.
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_RTC_ADDR = i2c chip address
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_BOOTCOUNT_ADDR = i2c addr which is used for
|
|
|
|
the bootcounter.
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_ALEN = address len
|
2013-06-13 22:10:02 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-12-06 19:49:23 +00:00
|
|
|
- Show boot progress:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SHOW_BOOT_PROGRESS
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Defining this option allows to add some board-
|
|
|
|
specific code (calling a user-provided function
|
|
|
|
"show_boot_progress(int)") that enables you to show
|
|
|
|
the system's boot progress on some display (for
|
|
|
|
example, some LED's) on your board. At the moment,
|
|
|
|
the following checkpoints are implemented:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
bootstage: Implement core microsecond boot time measurement
This defines the basics of a new boot time measurement feature. This allows
logging of very accurate time measurements as the boot proceeds, by using
an available microsecond counter.
To enable the feature, define CONFIG_BOOTSTAGE in your board config file.
Also available is CONFIG_BOOTSTAGE_REPORT which will cause a report to be
printed just before handing off to the OS.
Most IDs are not named at this stage. For that I would first like to
renumber them all.
Timer summary in microseconds:
Mark Elapsed Stage
0 0 reset
205,000 205,000 board_init_f
6,053,000 5,848,000 bootm_start
6,053,000 0 id=1
6,058,000 5,000 id=101
6,058,000 0 id=100
6,061,000 3,000 id=103
6,064,000 3,000 id=104
6,093,000 29,000 id=107
6,093,000 0 id=106
6,093,000 0 id=105
6,093,000 0 id=108
7,089,000 996,000 id=7
7,089,000 0 id=15
7,089,000 0 id=8
7,097,000 8,000 start_kernel
Signed-off-by: Simon Glass <sjg@chromium.org>
2012-02-13 13:51:19 +00:00
|
|
|
- Detailed boot stage timing
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTSTAGE
|
|
|
|
Define this option to get detailed timing of each stage
|
|
|
|
of the boot process.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTSTAGE_USER_COUNT
|
|
|
|
This is the number of available user bootstage records.
|
|
|
|
Each time you call bootstage_mark(BOOTSTAGE_ID_ALLOC, ...)
|
|
|
|
a new ID will be allocated from this stash. If you exceed
|
|
|
|
the limit, recording will stop.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTSTAGE_REPORT
|
|
|
|
Define this to print a report before boot, similar to this:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Timer summary in microseconds:
|
|
|
|
Mark Elapsed Stage
|
|
|
|
0 0 reset
|
|
|
|
3,575,678 3,575,678 board_init_f start
|
|
|
|
3,575,695 17 arch_cpu_init A9
|
|
|
|
3,575,777 82 arch_cpu_init done
|
|
|
|
3,659,598 83,821 board_init_r start
|
|
|
|
3,910,375 250,777 main_loop
|
|
|
|
29,916,167 26,005,792 bootm_start
|
|
|
|
30,361,327 445,160 start_kernel
|
|
|
|
|
2012-09-28 08:56:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_BOOTSTAGE
|
|
|
|
Add a 'bootstage' command which supports printing a report
|
|
|
|
and un/stashing of bootstage data.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-09-28 08:56:37 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTSTAGE_FDT
|
|
|
|
Stash the bootstage information in the FDT. A root 'bootstage'
|
|
|
|
node is created with each bootstage id as a child. Each child
|
|
|
|
has a 'name' property and either 'mark' containing the
|
|
|
|
mark time in microsecond, or 'accum' containing the
|
|
|
|
accumulated time for that bootstage id in microseconds.
|
|
|
|
For example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
bootstage {
|
|
|
|
154 {
|
|
|
|
name = "board_init_f";
|
|
|
|
mark = <3575678>;
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
170 {
|
|
|
|
name = "lcd";
|
|
|
|
accum = <33482>;
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Code in the Linux kernel can find this in /proc/devicetree.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-03-12 09:33:01 +00:00
|
|
|
Legacy uImage format:
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Arg Where When
|
|
|
|
1 common/cmd_bootm.c before attempting to boot an image
|
2004-02-06 23:19:44 +00:00
|
|
|
-1 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has bad magic number
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
2 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has correct magic number
|
2004-02-06 23:19:44 +00:00
|
|
|
-2 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has bad checksum
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
3 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has correct checksum
|
2004-02-06 23:19:44 +00:00
|
|
|
-3 common/cmd_bootm.c Image data has bad checksum
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
4 common/cmd_bootm.c Image data has correct checksum
|
|
|
|
-4 common/cmd_bootm.c Image is for unsupported architecture
|
|
|
|
5 common/cmd_bootm.c Architecture check OK
|
2008-03-12 09:33:01 +00:00
|
|
|
-5 common/cmd_bootm.c Wrong Image Type (not kernel, multi)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
6 common/cmd_bootm.c Image Type check OK
|
|
|
|
-6 common/cmd_bootm.c gunzip uncompression error
|
|
|
|
-7 common/cmd_bootm.c Unimplemented compression type
|
|
|
|
7 common/cmd_bootm.c Uncompression OK
|
2008-03-12 09:33:01 +00:00
|
|
|
8 common/cmd_bootm.c No uncompress/copy overwrite error
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
-9 common/cmd_bootm.c Unsupported OS (not Linux, BSD, VxWorks, QNX)
|
2008-03-12 09:33:01 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
9 common/image.c Start initial ramdisk verification
|
|
|
|
-10 common/image.c Ramdisk header has bad magic number
|
|
|
|
-11 common/image.c Ramdisk header has bad checksum
|
|
|
|
10 common/image.c Ramdisk header is OK
|
|
|
|
-12 common/image.c Ramdisk data has bad checksum
|
|
|
|
11 common/image.c Ramdisk data has correct checksum
|
|
|
|
12 common/image.c Ramdisk verification complete, start loading
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
-13 common/image.c Wrong Image Type (not PPC Linux ramdisk)
|
2008-03-12 09:33:01 +00:00
|
|
|
13 common/image.c Start multifile image verification
|
|
|
|
14 common/image.c No initial ramdisk, no multifile, continue.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
15 arch/<arch>/lib/bootm.c All preparation done, transferring control to OS
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2010-04-15 14:07:28 +00:00
|
|
|
-30 arch/powerpc/lib/board.c Fatal error, hang the system
|
2004-02-27 00:07:27 +00:00
|
|
|
-31 post/post.c POST test failed, detected by post_output_backlog()
|
|
|
|
-32 post/post.c POST test failed, detected by post_run_single()
|
2004-02-23 22:22:28 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2007-06-22 17:11:54 +00:00
|
|
|
34 common/cmd_doc.c before loading a Image from a DOC device
|
|
|
|
-35 common/cmd_doc.c Bad usage of "doc" command
|
|
|
|
35 common/cmd_doc.c correct usage of "doc" command
|
|
|
|
-36 common/cmd_doc.c No boot device
|
|
|
|
36 common/cmd_doc.c correct boot device
|
|
|
|
-37 common/cmd_doc.c Unknown Chip ID on boot device
|
|
|
|
37 common/cmd_doc.c correct chip ID found, device available
|
|
|
|
-38 common/cmd_doc.c Read Error on boot device
|
|
|
|
38 common/cmd_doc.c reading Image header from DOC device OK
|
|
|
|
-39 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has bad magic number
|
|
|
|
39 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has correct magic number
|
|
|
|
-40 common/cmd_doc.c Error reading Image from DOC device
|
|
|
|
40 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has correct magic number
|
|
|
|
41 common/cmd_ide.c before loading a Image from a IDE device
|
|
|
|
-42 common/cmd_ide.c Bad usage of "ide" command
|
|
|
|
42 common/cmd_ide.c correct usage of "ide" command
|
|
|
|
-43 common/cmd_ide.c No boot device
|
|
|
|
43 common/cmd_ide.c boot device found
|
|
|
|
-44 common/cmd_ide.c Device not available
|
|
|
|
44 common/cmd_ide.c Device available
|
|
|
|
-45 common/cmd_ide.c wrong partition selected
|
|
|
|
45 common/cmd_ide.c partition selected
|
|
|
|
-46 common/cmd_ide.c Unknown partition table
|
|
|
|
46 common/cmd_ide.c valid partition table found
|
|
|
|
-47 common/cmd_ide.c Invalid partition type
|
|
|
|
47 common/cmd_ide.c correct partition type
|
|
|
|
-48 common/cmd_ide.c Error reading Image Header on boot device
|
|
|
|
48 common/cmd_ide.c reading Image Header from IDE device OK
|
|
|
|
-49 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has bad magic number
|
|
|
|
49 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has correct magic number
|
|
|
|
-50 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has bad checksum
|
|
|
|
50 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has correct checksum
|
|
|
|
-51 common/cmd_ide.c Error reading Image from IDE device
|
|
|
|
51 common/cmd_ide.c reading Image from IDE device OK
|
|
|
|
52 common/cmd_nand.c before loading a Image from a NAND device
|
|
|
|
-53 common/cmd_nand.c Bad usage of "nand" command
|
|
|
|
53 common/cmd_nand.c correct usage of "nand" command
|
|
|
|
-54 common/cmd_nand.c No boot device
|
|
|
|
54 common/cmd_nand.c boot device found
|
|
|
|
-55 common/cmd_nand.c Unknown Chip ID on boot device
|
|
|
|
55 common/cmd_nand.c correct chip ID found, device available
|
|
|
|
-56 common/cmd_nand.c Error reading Image Header on boot device
|
|
|
|
56 common/cmd_nand.c reading Image Header from NAND device OK
|
|
|
|
-57 common/cmd_nand.c Image header has bad magic number
|
|
|
|
57 common/cmd_nand.c Image header has correct magic number
|
|
|
|
-58 common/cmd_nand.c Error reading Image from NAND device
|
|
|
|
58 common/cmd_nand.c reading Image from NAND device OK
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-60 common/env_common.c Environment has a bad CRC, using default
|
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
64 net/eth.c starting with Ethernet configuration.
|
2007-06-22 17:11:54 +00:00
|
|
|
-64 net/eth.c no Ethernet found.
|
|
|
|
65 net/eth.c Ethernet found.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-80 common/cmd_net.c usage wrong
|
|
|
|
80 common/cmd_net.c before calling NetLoop()
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
-81 common/cmd_net.c some error in NetLoop() occurred
|
2007-06-22 17:11:54 +00:00
|
|
|
81 common/cmd_net.c NetLoop() back without error
|
|
|
|
-82 common/cmd_net.c size == 0 (File with size 0 loaded)
|
|
|
|
82 common/cmd_net.c trying automatic boot
|
2009-04-01 21:34:12 +00:00
|
|
|
83 common/cmd_net.c running "source" command
|
|
|
|
-83 common/cmd_net.c some error in automatic boot or "source" command
|
2007-06-22 17:11:54 +00:00
|
|
|
84 common/cmd_net.c end without errors
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-03-12 09:33:01 +00:00
|
|
|
FIT uImage format:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Arg Where When
|
|
|
|
100 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel FIT Image has correct format
|
|
|
|
-100 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel FIT Image has incorrect format
|
|
|
|
101 common/cmd_bootm.c No Kernel subimage unit name, using configuration
|
|
|
|
-101 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get configuration for kernel subimage
|
|
|
|
102 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel unit name specified
|
|
|
|
-103 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage node offset
|
2008-03-12 09:35:46 +00:00
|
|
|
103 common/cmd_bootm.c Found configuration node
|
2008-03-12 09:33:01 +00:00
|
|
|
104 common/cmd_bootm.c Got kernel subimage node offset
|
|
|
|
-104 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage hash verification failed
|
|
|
|
105 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage hash verification OK
|
|
|
|
-105 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage is for unsupported architecture
|
|
|
|
106 common/cmd_bootm.c Architecture check OK
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
-106 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage has wrong type
|
|
|
|
107 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage type OK
|
2008-03-12 09:33:01 +00:00
|
|
|
-107 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage data/size
|
|
|
|
108 common/cmd_bootm.c Got kernel subimage data/size
|
|
|
|
-108 common/cmd_bootm.c Wrong image type (not legacy, FIT)
|
|
|
|
-109 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage type
|
|
|
|
-110 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage comp
|
|
|
|
-111 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage os
|
|
|
|
-112 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage load address
|
|
|
|
-113 common/cmd_bootm.c Image uncompress/copy overwrite error
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
120 common/image.c Start initial ramdisk verification
|
|
|
|
-120 common/image.c Ramdisk FIT image has incorrect format
|
|
|
|
121 common/image.c Ramdisk FIT image has correct format
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
122 common/image.c No ramdisk subimage unit name, using configuration
|
2008-03-12 09:33:01 +00:00
|
|
|
-122 common/image.c Can't get configuration for ramdisk subimage
|
|
|
|
123 common/image.c Ramdisk unit name specified
|
|
|
|
-124 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk subimage node offset
|
|
|
|
125 common/image.c Got ramdisk subimage node offset
|
|
|
|
-125 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage hash verification failed
|
|
|
|
126 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage hash verification OK
|
|
|
|
-126 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage for unsupported architecture
|
|
|
|
127 common/image.c Architecture check OK
|
|
|
|
-127 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk subimage data/size
|
|
|
|
128 common/image.c Got ramdisk subimage data/size
|
|
|
|
129 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk load address
|
|
|
|
-129 common/image.c Got ramdisk load address
|
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
-130 common/cmd_doc.c Incorrect FIT image format
|
2008-03-12 09:33:01 +00:00
|
|
|
131 common/cmd_doc.c FIT image format OK
|
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
-140 common/cmd_ide.c Incorrect FIT image format
|
2008-03-12 09:33:01 +00:00
|
|
|
141 common/cmd_ide.c FIT image format OK
|
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
-150 common/cmd_nand.c Incorrect FIT image format
|
2008-03-12 09:33:01 +00:00
|
|
|
151 common/cmd_nand.c FIT image format OK
|
|
|
|
|
2014-05-28 09:33:33 +00:00
|
|
|
- legacy image format:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_IMAGE_FORMAT_LEGACY
|
|
|
|
enables the legacy image format support in U-Boot.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Default:
|
|
|
|
enabled if CONFIG_FIT_SIGNATURE is not defined.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_DISABLE_IMAGE_LEGACY
|
|
|
|
disable the legacy image format
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This define is introduced, as the legacy image format is
|
|
|
|
enabled per default for backward compatibility.
|
|
|
|
|
fdt: Add option to default to most compatible conf in a fit image
When booting a fit image with multiple configurations, the user either has to
specify which configuration to use explicitly, or there has to be a default
defined which is chosen automatically. This change adds an option to change
that behavior so that a configuration can be selected explicitly, or the
configuration which has the device tree that claims to be compatible with the
earliest item in U-Boot's device tree.
In other words, if U-Boot claimed to be compatible with A, B, and then C, and
the configurations claimed to be compatible with A, D and B, D and D, E, the
first configuration, A, D, would be chosen. Both the first and second
configurations match, but the first one matches a more specific entry in
U-Boot's device tree. The order in the kernel's device tree is ignored.
Signed-off-by: Gabe Black <gabeblack@google.com>
Commit-Ready: Gabe Black <gabeblack@chromium.org>
Signed-off-by: Simon Glass <sjg@chromium.org>
2012-10-25 16:31:10 +00:00
|
|
|
- FIT image support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_FIT
|
|
|
|
Enable support for the FIT uImage format.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_FIT_BEST_MATCH
|
|
|
|
When no configuration is explicitly selected, default to the
|
|
|
|
one whose fdt's compatibility field best matches that of
|
|
|
|
U-Boot itself. A match is considered "best" if it matches the
|
|
|
|
most specific compatibility entry of U-Boot's fdt's root node.
|
|
|
|
The order of entries in the configuration's fdt is ignored.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-06-13 22:10:00 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_FIT_SIGNATURE
|
|
|
|
This option enables signature verification of FIT uImages,
|
|
|
|
using a hash signed and verified using RSA. See
|
|
|
|
doc/uImage.FIT/signature.txt for more details.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-05-28 09:33:33 +00:00
|
|
|
WARNING: When relying on signed FIT images with required
|
|
|
|
signature check the legacy image format is default
|
|
|
|
disabled. If a board need legacy image format support
|
|
|
|
enable this through CONFIG_IMAGE_FORMAT_LEGACY
|
|
|
|
|
2014-07-03 07:28:26 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_FIT_DISABLE_SHA256
|
|
|
|
Supporting SHA256 hashes has quite an impact on binary size.
|
|
|
|
For constrained systems sha256 hash support can be disabled
|
|
|
|
with this option.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-10-07 07:58:21 +00:00
|
|
|
- Standalone program support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_STANDALONE_LOAD_ADDR
|
|
|
|
|
2011-10-09 19:06:34 +00:00
|
|
|
This option defines a board specific value for the
|
|
|
|
address where standalone program gets loaded, thus
|
|
|
|
overwriting the architecture dependent default
|
2011-10-07 07:58:21 +00:00
|
|
|
settings.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Frame Buffer Address:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_FB_ADDR
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define CONFIG_FB_ADDR if you want to use specific
|
2013-01-03 00:43:59 +00:00
|
|
|
address for frame buffer. This is typically the case
|
|
|
|
when using a graphics controller has separate video
|
|
|
|
memory. U-Boot will then place the frame buffer at
|
|
|
|
the given address instead of dynamically reserving it
|
|
|
|
in system RAM by calling lcd_setmem(), which grabs
|
|
|
|
the memory for the frame buffer depending on the
|
|
|
|
configured panel size.
|
2011-10-07 07:58:21 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please see board_init_f function.
|
|
|
|
|
2009-12-01 16:16:19 +00:00
|
|
|
- Automatic software updates via TFTP server
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_CNT_MAX
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_MSEC_MAX
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
These options enable and control the auto-update feature;
|
|
|
|
for a more detailed description refer to doc/README.update.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- MTD Support (mtdparts command, UBI support)
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_MTD_DEVICE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Adds the MTD device infrastructure from the Linux kernel.
|
|
|
|
Needed for mtdparts command support.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_MTD_PARTITIONS
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Adds the MTD partitioning infrastructure from the Linux
|
|
|
|
kernel. Needed for UBI support.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-06-24 08:10:04 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_MTD_NAND_VERIFY_WRITE
|
|
|
|
verify if the written data is correct reread.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-08 10:32:48 +00:00
|
|
|
- UBI support
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_UBI
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Adds commands for interacting with MTD partitions formatted
|
|
|
|
with the UBI flash translation layer
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Requires also defining CONFIG_RBTREE
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-08 10:32:49 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_UBI_SILENCE_MSG
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Make the verbose messages from UBI stop printing. This leaves
|
|
|
|
warnings and errors enabled.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-06-24 08:10:04 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_MTD_UBI_WL_THRESHOLD
|
|
|
|
This parameter defines the maximum difference between the highest
|
|
|
|
erase counter value and the lowest erase counter value of eraseblocks
|
|
|
|
of UBI devices. When this threshold is exceeded, UBI starts performing
|
|
|
|
wear leveling by means of moving data from eraseblock with low erase
|
|
|
|
counter to eraseblocks with high erase counter.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The default value should be OK for SLC NAND flashes, NOR flashes and
|
|
|
|
other flashes which have eraseblock life-cycle 100000 or more.
|
|
|
|
However, in case of MLC NAND flashes which typically have eraseblock
|
|
|
|
life-cycle less than 10000, the threshold should be lessened (e.g.,
|
|
|
|
to 128 or 256, although it does not have to be power of 2).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
default: 4096
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_MTD_UBI_BEB_LIMIT
|
|
|
|
This option specifies the maximum bad physical eraseblocks UBI
|
|
|
|
expects on the MTD device (per 1024 eraseblocks). If the
|
|
|
|
underlying flash does not admit of bad eraseblocks (e.g. NOR
|
|
|
|
flash), this value is ignored.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NAND datasheets often specify the minimum and maximum NVM
|
|
|
|
(Number of Valid Blocks) for the flashes' endurance lifetime.
|
|
|
|
The maximum expected bad eraseblocks per 1024 eraseblocks
|
|
|
|
then can be calculated as "1024 * (1 - MinNVB / MaxNVB)",
|
|
|
|
which gives 20 for most NANDs (MaxNVB is basically the total
|
|
|
|
count of eraseblocks on the chip).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To put it differently, if this value is 20, UBI will try to
|
|
|
|
reserve about 1.9% of physical eraseblocks for bad blocks
|
|
|
|
handling. And that will be 1.9% of eraseblocks on the entire
|
|
|
|
NAND chip, not just the MTD partition UBI attaches. This means
|
|
|
|
that if you have, say, a NAND flash chip admits maximum 40 bad
|
|
|
|
eraseblocks, and it is split on two MTD partitions of the same
|
|
|
|
size, UBI will reserve 40 eraseblocks when attaching a
|
|
|
|
partition.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
default: 20
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP
|
|
|
|
Fastmap is a mechanism which allows attaching an UBI device
|
|
|
|
in nearly constant time. Instead of scanning the whole MTD device it
|
|
|
|
only has to locate a checkpoint (called fastmap) on the device.
|
|
|
|
The on-flash fastmap contains all information needed to attach
|
|
|
|
the device. Using fastmap makes only sense on large devices where
|
|
|
|
attaching by scanning takes long. UBI will not automatically install
|
|
|
|
a fastmap on old images, but you can set the UBI parameter
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT to 1 if you want so. Please note
|
|
|
|
that fastmap-enabled images are still usable with UBI implementations
|
|
|
|
without fastmap support. On typical flash devices the whole fastmap
|
|
|
|
fits into one PEB. UBI will reserve PEBs to hold two fastmaps.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT
|
|
|
|
Set this parameter to enable fastmap automatically on images
|
|
|
|
without a fastmap.
|
|
|
|
default: 0
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-08 10:32:48 +00:00
|
|
|
- UBIFS support
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMD_UBIFS
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Adds commands for interacting with UBI volumes formatted as
|
|
|
|
UBIFS. UBIFS is read-only in u-boot.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Requires UBI support as well as CONFIG_LZO
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-08 10:32:49 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_UBIFS_SILENCE_MSG
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Make the verbose messages from UBIFS stop printing. This leaves
|
|
|
|
warnings and errors enabled.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-07-18 07:48:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- SPL framework
|
2011-09-11 19:24:09 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL
|
|
|
|
Enable building of SPL globally.
|
2011-07-18 07:48:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_LDSCRIPT
|
|
|
|
LDSCRIPT for linking the SPL binary.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-12 05:14:30 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT
|
|
|
|
Maximum size in memory allocated to the SPL, BSS included.
|
|
|
|
When defined, the linker checks that the actual memory
|
|
|
|
used by SPL from _start to __bss_end does not exceed it.
|
2013-04-14 04:48:38 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT and CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE
|
2013-04-12 05:14:30 +00:00
|
|
|
must not be both defined at the same time.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE
|
2013-04-12 05:14:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Maximum size of the SPL image (text, data, rodata, and
|
|
|
|
linker lists sections), BSS excluded.
|
|
|
|
When defined, the linker checks that the actual size does
|
|
|
|
not exceed it.
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-09-11 19:24:09 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE
|
|
|
|
TEXT_BASE for linking the SPL binary.
|
2011-07-18 07:48:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-09-21 00:05:12 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_RELOC_TEXT_BASE
|
|
|
|
Address to relocate to. If unspecified, this is equal to
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE (i.e. no relocation is done).
|
|
|
|
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_BSS_START_ADDR
|
|
|
|
Link address for the BSS within the SPL binary.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE
|
2013-04-12 05:14:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Maximum size in memory allocated to the SPL BSS.
|
|
|
|
When defined, the linker checks that the actual memory used
|
|
|
|
by SPL from __bss_start to __bss_end does not exceed it.
|
2013-04-14 04:48:38 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT and CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE
|
2013-04-12 05:14:30 +00:00
|
|
|
must not be both defined at the same time.
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_STACK
|
|
|
|
Adress of the start of the stack SPL will use
|
|
|
|
|
2012-09-21 00:05:12 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_RELOC_STACK
|
|
|
|
Adress of the start of the stack SPL will use after
|
|
|
|
relocation. If unspecified, this is equal to
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_STACK.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_START
|
|
|
|
Starting address of the malloc pool used in SPL.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_SIZE
|
|
|
|
The size of the malloc pool used in SPL.
|
2011-07-18 07:48:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-08-13 19:03:19 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_FRAMEWORK
|
|
|
|
Enable the SPL framework under common/. This framework
|
|
|
|
supports MMC, NAND and YMODEM loading of U-Boot and NAND
|
|
|
|
NAND loading of the Linux Kernel.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-03-28 16:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_OS_BOOT
|
|
|
|
Enable booting directly to an OS from SPL.
|
|
|
|
See also: doc/README.falcon
|
|
|
|
|
2012-08-13 18:37:56 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_DISPLAY_PRINT
|
|
|
|
For ARM, enable an optional function to print more information
|
|
|
|
about the running system.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-09-20 21:35:21 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_INIT_MINIMAL
|
|
|
|
Arch init code should be built for a very small image
|
|
|
|
|
2011-09-11 19:24:09 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_LIBCOMMON_SUPPORT
|
|
|
|
Support for common/libcommon.o in SPL binary
|
2011-07-18 07:48:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-09-11 19:24:09 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_LIBDISK_SUPPORT
|
|
|
|
Support for disk/libdisk.o in SPL binary
|
2011-07-18 07:48:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-09-11 19:24:09 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_I2C_SUPPORT
|
|
|
|
Support for drivers/i2c/libi2c.o in SPL binary
|
2011-07-18 07:48:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-09-11 19:24:09 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_GPIO_SUPPORT
|
|
|
|
Support for drivers/gpio/libgpio.o in SPL binary
|
2011-07-18 07:48:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-09-11 19:24:09 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_MMC_SUPPORT
|
|
|
|
Support for drivers/mmc/libmmc.o in SPL binary
|
2011-07-18 07:48:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_U_BOOT_SECTOR,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_U_BOOT_MAX_SIZE_SECTORS,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_MMC_SD_FAT_BOOT_PARTITION
|
|
|
|
Address, size and partition on the MMC to load U-Boot from
|
|
|
|
when the MMC is being used in raw mode.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-05-13 08:36:29 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_KERNEL_SECTOR
|
|
|
|
Sector to load kernel uImage from when MMC is being
|
|
|
|
used in raw mode (for Falcon mode)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_ARGS_SECTOR,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_ARGS_SECTORS
|
|
|
|
Sector and number of sectors to load kernel argument
|
|
|
|
parameters from when MMC is being used in raw mode
|
|
|
|
(for falcon mode)
|
|
|
|
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_FAT_SUPPORT
|
|
|
|
Support for fs/fat/libfat.o in SPL binary
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_FAT_LOAD_PAYLOAD_NAME
|
|
|
|
Filename to read to load U-Boot when reading from FAT
|
|
|
|
|
2013-05-13 08:36:27 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_FAT_LOAD_KERNEL_NAME
|
|
|
|
Filename to read to load kernel uImage when reading
|
|
|
|
from FAT (for Falcon mode)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_FAT_LOAD_ARGS_NAME
|
|
|
|
Filename to read to load kernel argument parameters
|
|
|
|
when reading from FAT (for Falcon mode)
|
|
|
|
|
2012-12-06 13:33:17 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_MPC83XX_WAIT_FOR_NAND
|
|
|
|
Set this for NAND SPL on PPC mpc83xx targets, so that
|
|
|
|
start.S waits for the rest of the SPL to load before
|
|
|
|
continuing (the hardware starts execution after just
|
|
|
|
loading the first page rather than the full 4K).
|
|
|
|
|
2014-04-08 13:42:31 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_SKIP_RELOCATE
|
|
|
|
Avoid SPL relocation
|
|
|
|
|
2012-09-21 00:09:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_NAND_BASE
|
|
|
|
Include nand_base.c in the SPL. Requires
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_NAND_DRIVERS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_NAND_DRIVERS
|
|
|
|
SPL uses normal NAND drivers, not minimal drivers.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_NAND_ECC
|
|
|
|
Include standard software ECC in the SPL
|
|
|
|
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_NAND_SIMPLE
|
2012-09-21 23:35:27 +00:00
|
|
|
Support for NAND boot using simple NAND drivers that
|
|
|
|
expose the cmd_ctrl() interface.
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-03-28 16:03:36 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_MTD_SUPPORT
|
|
|
|
Support for the MTD subsystem within SPL. Useful for
|
|
|
|
environment on NAND support within SPL.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-08-16 07:16:11 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_MPC8XXX_INIT_DDR_SUPPORT
|
|
|
|
Set for the SPL on PPC mpc8xxx targets, support for
|
2013-09-30 16:22:09 +00:00
|
|
|
drivers/ddr/fsl/libddr.o in SPL binary.
|
2013-08-16 07:16:11 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2013-08-16 07:16:12 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_COMMON_INIT_DDR
|
|
|
|
Set for common ddr init with serial presence detect in
|
|
|
|
SPL binary.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NAND_5_ADDR_CYCLE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_COUNT,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_OOBSIZE,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BLOCK_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BAD_BLOCK_POS,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCPOS, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCSIZE,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCBYTES
|
|
|
|
Defines the size and behavior of the NAND that SPL uses
|
2012-09-21 23:35:27 +00:00
|
|
|
to read U-Boot
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2013-12-11 07:12:11 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_NAND_BOOT
|
|
|
|
Add support NAND boot
|
|
|
|
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_OFFS
|
2012-09-21 23:35:27 +00:00
|
|
|
Location in NAND to read U-Boot from
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_DST
|
|
|
|
Location in memory to load U-Boot to
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_SIZE
|
|
|
|
Size of image to load
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_START
|
2012-09-21 23:35:27 +00:00
|
|
|
Entry point in loaded image to jump to
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NAND_HW_ECC_OOBFIRST
|
|
|
|
Define this if you need to first read the OOB and then the
|
|
|
|
data. This is used for example on davinci plattforms.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_OMAP3_ID_NAND
|
|
|
|
Support for an OMAP3-specific set of functions to return the
|
|
|
|
ID and MFR of the first attached NAND chip, if present.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-09-11 19:24:09 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_SERIAL_SUPPORT
|
|
|
|
Support for drivers/serial/libserial.o in SPL binary
|
2011-07-18 07:48:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-09-11 19:24:09 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_SPI_FLASH_SUPPORT
|
|
|
|
Support for drivers/mtd/spi/libspi_flash.o in SPL binary
|
2011-07-18 07:48:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-09-11 19:24:09 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_SPI_SUPPORT
|
|
|
|
Support for drivers/spi/libspi.o in SPL binary
|
2012-08-30 20:42:11 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_RAM_DEVICE
|
|
|
|
Support for running image already present in ram, in SPL binary
|
2011-07-18 07:48:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-09-11 19:24:09 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_LIBGENERIC_SUPPORT
|
|
|
|
Support for lib/libgeneric.o in SPL binary
|
2008-03-12 09:33:01 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2013-05-20 06:07:25 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_ENV_SUPPORT
|
|
|
|
Support for the environment operating in SPL binary
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_NET_SUPPORT
|
|
|
|
Support for the net/libnet.o in SPL binary.
|
|
|
|
It conflicts with SPL env from storage medium specified by
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_ENV_IS_xxx but CONFIG_ENV_IS_NOWHERE
|
|
|
|
|
2012-12-06 13:33:16 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO
|
2013-04-11 09:35:49 +00:00
|
|
|
Image offset to which the SPL should be padded before appending
|
|
|
|
the SPL payload. By default, this is defined as
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE, or 0 if CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE is undefined.
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO must be either 0, meaning to append the SPL
|
|
|
|
payload without any padding, or >= CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE.
|
2012-12-06 13:33:16 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-09-21 21:27:32 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_TARGET
|
|
|
|
Final target image containing SPL and payload. Some SPLs
|
|
|
|
use an arch-specific makefile fragment instead, for
|
|
|
|
example if more than one image needs to be produced.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-05-08 08:05:59 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_FIT_SPL_PRINT
|
|
|
|
Printing information about a FIT image adds quite a bit of
|
|
|
|
code to SPL. So this is normally disabled in SPL. Use this
|
|
|
|
option to re-enable it. This will affect the output of the
|
|
|
|
bootm command when booting a FIT image.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-08-16 07:16:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- TPL framework
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPL
|
|
|
|
Enable building of TPL globally.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPL_PAD_TO
|
|
|
|
Image offset to which the TPL should be padded before appending
|
|
|
|
the TPL payload. By default, this is defined as
|
2013-10-04 15:43:24 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE, or 0 if CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE is undefined.
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO must be either 0, meaning to append the SPL
|
|
|
|
payload without any padding, or >= CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE.
|
2013-08-16 07:16:15 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Modem Support:
|
|
|
|
--------------
|
|
|
|
|
2011-05-01 18:44:23 +00:00
|
|
|
[so far only for SMDK2400 boards]
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- Modem support enable:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_MODEM_SUPPORT
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- RTS/CTS Flow control enable:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_HWFLOW
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Modem debug support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_MODEM_SUPPORT_DEBUG
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Enables debugging stuff (char screen[1024], dbg())
|
|
|
|
for modem support. Useful only with BDI2000.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-12-06 19:49:23 +00:00
|
|
|
- Interrupt support (PPC):
|
|
|
|
|
2004-01-02 14:00:00 +00:00
|
|
|
There are common interrupt_init() and timer_interrupt()
|
|
|
|
for all PPC archs. interrupt_init() calls interrupt_init_cpu()
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
for CPU specific initialization. interrupt_init_cpu()
|
2004-01-02 14:00:00 +00:00
|
|
|
should set decrementer_count to appropriate value. If
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CPU resets decrementer automatically after interrupt
|
2004-01-02 14:00:00 +00:00
|
|
|
(ppc4xx) it should set decrementer_count to zero.
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
timer_interrupt() calls timer_interrupt_cpu() for CPU
|
2004-01-02 14:00:00 +00:00
|
|
|
specific handling. If board has watchdog / status_led
|
|
|
|
/ other_activity_monitor it works automatically from
|
|
|
|
general timer_interrupt().
|
2003-12-06 19:49:23 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- General:
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
In the target system modem support is enabled when a
|
|
|
|
specific key (key combination) is pressed during
|
|
|
|
power-on. Otherwise U-Boot will boot normally
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
(autoboot). The key_pressed() function is called from
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
board_init(). Currently key_pressed() is a dummy
|
|
|
|
function, returning 1 and thus enabling modem
|
|
|
|
initialization.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
If there are no modem init strings in the
|
|
|
|
environment, U-Boot proceed to autoboot; the
|
|
|
|
previous output (banner, info printfs) will be
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
suppressed, though.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also: doc/README.Modem
|
|
|
|
|
2011-10-20 04:19:47 +00:00
|
|
|
Board initialization settings:
|
|
|
|
------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
During Initialization u-boot calls a number of board specific functions
|
|
|
|
to allow the preparation of board specific prerequisites, e.g. pin setup
|
|
|
|
before drivers are initialized. To enable these callbacks the
|
|
|
|
following configuration macros have to be defined. Currently this is
|
|
|
|
architecture specific, so please check arch/your_architecture/lib/board.c
|
|
|
|
typically in board_init_f() and board_init_r().
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_BOARD_EARLY_INIT_F: Call board_early_init_f()
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_BOARD_EARLY_INIT_R: Call board_early_init_r()
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_BOARD_LATE_INIT: Call board_late_init()
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_BOARD_POSTCLK_INIT: Call board_postclk_init()
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Configuration Settings:
|
|
|
|
-----------------------
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-27 01:03:19 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SUPPORT_64BIT_DATA: Defined automatically if compiled as 64-bit.
|
|
|
|
Optionally it can be defined to support 64-bit memory commands.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_LONGHELP: Defined when you want long help messages included;
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
undefine this when you're short of memory.
|
|
|
|
|
2009-01-28 00:03:12 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_HELP_CMD_WIDTH: Defined when you want to override the default
|
|
|
|
width of the commands listed in the 'help' command output.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_PROMPT: This is what U-Boot prints on the console to
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
prompt for user input.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CBSIZE: Buffer size for input from the Console
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_PBSIZE: Buffer size for Console output
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MAXARGS: max. Number of arguments accepted for monitor commands
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_BARGSIZE: Buffer size for Boot Arguments which are passed to
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
the application (usually a Linux kernel) when it is
|
|
|
|
booted
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
List of legal baudrate settings for this board.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_INFO_QUIET
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
Suppress display of console information at boot.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_IS_IN_ENV
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
If the board specific function
|
|
|
|
extern int overwrite_console (void);
|
|
|
|
returns 1, the stdin, stderr and stdout are switched to the
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
serial port, else the settings in the environment are used.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_OVERWRITE_ROUTINE
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
Enable the call to overwrite_console().
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_ENV_OVERWRITE
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Enable overwrite of previous console environment settings.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_START, CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_END:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Begin and End addresses of the area used by the
|
|
|
|
simple memory test.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_ALT_MEMTEST:
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
Enable an alternate, more extensive memory test.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_SCRATCH:
|
2003-09-18 09:21:33 +00:00
|
|
|
Scratch address used by the alternate memory test
|
|
|
|
You only need to set this if address zero isn't writeable
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MEM_TOP_HIDE (PPC only):
|
|
|
|
If CONFIG_SYS_MEM_TOP_HIDE is defined in the board config header,
|
ppc: Add CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE option to hide memory area that doesn't get "touched"
If CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE is defined in the board config header, this specified
memory area will get subtracted from the top (end) of ram and won't get
"touched" at all by U-Boot. By fixing up gd->ram_size the Linux kernel
should gets passed the now "corrected" memory size and won't touch it
either. This should work for arch/ppc and arch/powerpc. Only Linux board
ports in arch/powerpc with bootwrapper support, which recalculate the
memory size from the SDRAM controller setup, will have to get fixed
in Linux additionally.
This patch enables this config option on some PPC440EPx boards as a workaround
for the CHIP 11 errata. Here the description from the AMCC documentation:
CHIP_11: End of memory range area restricted access.
Category: 3
Overview:
The 440EPx DDR controller does not acknowledge any
transaction which is determined to be crossing over the
end-of-memory-range boundary, even if the starting address is
within valid memory space. Any such transaction from any PLB4
master will result in a PLB time-out on PLB4 bus.
Impact:
In case of such misaligned bursts, PLB4 masters will not
retrieve any data at all, just the available data up to the
end of memory, especially the 440 CPU. For example, if a CPU
instruction required an operand located in memory within the
last 7 words of memory, the DCU master would burst read 8
words to update the data cache and cross over the
end-of-memory-range boundary. Such a DCU read would not be
answered by the DDR controller, resulting in a PLB4 time-out
and ultimately in a Machine Check interrupt. The data would
be inaccessible to the CPU.
Workaround:
Forbid any application to access the last 256 bytes of DDR
memory. For example, make your operating system believe that
the last 256 bytes of DDR memory are absent. AMCC has a patch
that does this, available for Linux.
This patch sets CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE for the following 440EPx boards:
lwmon5, korat, sequoia
The other remaining 440EPx board were intentionally not included
since it is not clear to me, if they use the end of ram for some
other purpose. This is unclear, since these boards have CONFIG_PRAM
defined and even comments like this:
PMC440.h:
/* esd expects pram at end of physical memory.
* So no logbuffer at the moment.
*/
It is strongly recommended to not use the last 256 bytes on those
boards too. Patches from the board maintainers are welcome.
Signed-off-by: Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de>
2008-03-26 09:14:11 +00:00
|
|
|
this specified memory area will get subtracted from the top
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
(end) of RAM and won't get "touched" at all by U-Boot. By
|
ppc: Add CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE option to hide memory area that doesn't get "touched"
If CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE is defined in the board config header, this specified
memory area will get subtracted from the top (end) of ram and won't get
"touched" at all by U-Boot. By fixing up gd->ram_size the Linux kernel
should gets passed the now "corrected" memory size and won't touch it
either. This should work for arch/ppc and arch/powerpc. Only Linux board
ports in arch/powerpc with bootwrapper support, which recalculate the
memory size from the SDRAM controller setup, will have to get fixed
in Linux additionally.
This patch enables this config option on some PPC440EPx boards as a workaround
for the CHIP 11 errata. Here the description from the AMCC documentation:
CHIP_11: End of memory range area restricted access.
Category: 3
Overview:
The 440EPx DDR controller does not acknowledge any
transaction which is determined to be crossing over the
end-of-memory-range boundary, even if the starting address is
within valid memory space. Any such transaction from any PLB4
master will result in a PLB time-out on PLB4 bus.
Impact:
In case of such misaligned bursts, PLB4 masters will not
retrieve any data at all, just the available data up to the
end of memory, especially the 440 CPU. For example, if a CPU
instruction required an operand located in memory within the
last 7 words of memory, the DCU master would burst read 8
words to update the data cache and cross over the
end-of-memory-range boundary. Such a DCU read would not be
answered by the DDR controller, resulting in a PLB4 time-out
and ultimately in a Machine Check interrupt. The data would
be inaccessible to the CPU.
Workaround:
Forbid any application to access the last 256 bytes of DDR
memory. For example, make your operating system believe that
the last 256 bytes of DDR memory are absent. AMCC has a patch
that does this, available for Linux.
This patch sets CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE for the following 440EPx boards:
lwmon5, korat, sequoia
The other remaining 440EPx board were intentionally not included
since it is not clear to me, if they use the end of ram for some
other purpose. This is unclear, since these boards have CONFIG_PRAM
defined and even comments like this:
PMC440.h:
/* esd expects pram at end of physical memory.
* So no logbuffer at the moment.
*/
It is strongly recommended to not use the last 256 bytes on those
boards too. Patches from the board maintainers are welcome.
Signed-off-by: Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de>
2008-03-26 09:14:11 +00:00
|
|
|
fixing up gd->ram_size the Linux kernel should gets passed
|
|
|
|
the now "corrected" memory size and won't touch it either.
|
|
|
|
This should work for arch/ppc and arch/powerpc. Only Linux
|
2008-03-28 10:02:53 +00:00
|
|
|
board ports in arch/powerpc with bootwrapper support that
|
ppc: Add CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE option to hide memory area that doesn't get "touched"
If CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE is defined in the board config header, this specified
memory area will get subtracted from the top (end) of ram and won't get
"touched" at all by U-Boot. By fixing up gd->ram_size the Linux kernel
should gets passed the now "corrected" memory size and won't touch it
either. This should work for arch/ppc and arch/powerpc. Only Linux board
ports in arch/powerpc with bootwrapper support, which recalculate the
memory size from the SDRAM controller setup, will have to get fixed
in Linux additionally.
This patch enables this config option on some PPC440EPx boards as a workaround
for the CHIP 11 errata. Here the description from the AMCC documentation:
CHIP_11: End of memory range area restricted access.
Category: 3
Overview:
The 440EPx DDR controller does not acknowledge any
transaction which is determined to be crossing over the
end-of-memory-range boundary, even if the starting address is
within valid memory space. Any such transaction from any PLB4
master will result in a PLB time-out on PLB4 bus.
Impact:
In case of such misaligned bursts, PLB4 masters will not
retrieve any data at all, just the available data up to the
end of memory, especially the 440 CPU. For example, if a CPU
instruction required an operand located in memory within the
last 7 words of memory, the DCU master would burst read 8
words to update the data cache and cross over the
end-of-memory-range boundary. Such a DCU read would not be
answered by the DDR controller, resulting in a PLB4 time-out
and ultimately in a Machine Check interrupt. The data would
be inaccessible to the CPU.
Workaround:
Forbid any application to access the last 256 bytes of DDR
memory. For example, make your operating system believe that
the last 256 bytes of DDR memory are absent. AMCC has a patch
that does this, available for Linux.
This patch sets CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE for the following 440EPx boards:
lwmon5, korat, sequoia
The other remaining 440EPx board were intentionally not included
since it is not clear to me, if they use the end of ram for some
other purpose. This is unclear, since these boards have CONFIG_PRAM
defined and even comments like this:
PMC440.h:
/* esd expects pram at end of physical memory.
* So no logbuffer at the moment.
*/
It is strongly recommended to not use the last 256 bytes on those
boards too. Patches from the board maintainers are welcome.
Signed-off-by: Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de>
2008-03-26 09:14:11 +00:00
|
|
|
recalculate the memory size from the SDRAM controller setup
|
2008-03-28 10:02:53 +00:00
|
|
|
will have to get fixed in Linux additionally.
|
ppc: Add CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE option to hide memory area that doesn't get "touched"
If CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE is defined in the board config header, this specified
memory area will get subtracted from the top (end) of ram and won't get
"touched" at all by U-Boot. By fixing up gd->ram_size the Linux kernel
should gets passed the now "corrected" memory size and won't touch it
either. This should work for arch/ppc and arch/powerpc. Only Linux board
ports in arch/powerpc with bootwrapper support, which recalculate the
memory size from the SDRAM controller setup, will have to get fixed
in Linux additionally.
This patch enables this config option on some PPC440EPx boards as a workaround
for the CHIP 11 errata. Here the description from the AMCC documentation:
CHIP_11: End of memory range area restricted access.
Category: 3
Overview:
The 440EPx DDR controller does not acknowledge any
transaction which is determined to be crossing over the
end-of-memory-range boundary, even if the starting address is
within valid memory space. Any such transaction from any PLB4
master will result in a PLB time-out on PLB4 bus.
Impact:
In case of such misaligned bursts, PLB4 masters will not
retrieve any data at all, just the available data up to the
end of memory, especially the 440 CPU. For example, if a CPU
instruction required an operand located in memory within the
last 7 words of memory, the DCU master would burst read 8
words to update the data cache and cross over the
end-of-memory-range boundary. Such a DCU read would not be
answered by the DDR controller, resulting in a PLB4 time-out
and ultimately in a Machine Check interrupt. The data would
be inaccessible to the CPU.
Workaround:
Forbid any application to access the last 256 bytes of DDR
memory. For example, make your operating system believe that
the last 256 bytes of DDR memory are absent. AMCC has a patch
that does this, available for Linux.
This patch sets CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE for the following 440EPx boards:
lwmon5, korat, sequoia
The other remaining 440EPx board were intentionally not included
since it is not clear to me, if they use the end of ram for some
other purpose. This is unclear, since these boards have CONFIG_PRAM
defined and even comments like this:
PMC440.h:
/* esd expects pram at end of physical memory.
* So no logbuffer at the moment.
*/
It is strongly recommended to not use the last 256 bytes on those
boards too. Patches from the board maintainers are welcome.
Signed-off-by: Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de>
2008-03-26 09:14:11 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This option can be used as a workaround for the 440EPx/GRx
|
|
|
|
CHIP 11 errata where the last 256 bytes in SDRAM shouldn't
|
|
|
|
be touched.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
WARNING: Please make sure that this value is a multiple of
|
|
|
|
the Linux page size (normally 4k). If this is not the case,
|
|
|
|
then the end address of the Linux memory will be located at a
|
|
|
|
non page size aligned address and this could cause major
|
|
|
|
problems.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_LOADS_BAUD_CHANGE:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Enable temporary baudrate change while serial download
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Physical start address of SDRAM. _Must_ be 0 here.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MBIO_BASE:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Physical start address of Motherboard I/O (if using a
|
|
|
|
Cogent motherboard)
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Physical start address of Flash memory.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Physical start address of boot monitor code (set by
|
|
|
|
make config files to be same as the text base address
|
2010-10-07 19:51:12 +00:00
|
|
|
(CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE) used when linking) - same as
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE when booting from flash.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_LEN:
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
Size of memory reserved for monitor code, used to
|
|
|
|
determine _at_compile_time_ (!) if the environment is
|
|
|
|
embedded within the U-Boot image, or in a separate
|
|
|
|
flash sector.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Size of DRAM reserved for malloc() use.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-07-11 04:23:28 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_F_LEN
|
|
|
|
Size of the malloc() pool for use before relocation. If
|
|
|
|
this is defined, then a very simple malloc() implementation
|
|
|
|
will become available before relocation. The address is just
|
|
|
|
below the global data, and the stack is moved down to make
|
|
|
|
space.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This feature allocates regions with increasing addresses
|
|
|
|
within the region. calloc() is supported, but realloc()
|
|
|
|
is not available. free() is supported but does nothing.
|
|
|
|
The memory will be freed (or in fact just forgotton) when
|
|
|
|
U-Boot relocates itself.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-09-15 12:33:18 +00:00
|
|
|
Pre-relocation malloc() is only supported on ARM and sandbox
|
2014-07-11 04:23:31 +00:00
|
|
|
at present but is fairly easy to enable for other archs.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_BOOTM_LEN:
|
2006-03-13 10:16:36 +00:00
|
|
|
Normally compressed uImages are limited to an
|
|
|
|
uncompressed size of 8 MBytes. If this is not enough,
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
you can define CONFIG_SYS_BOOTM_LEN in your board config file
|
2006-03-13 10:16:36 +00:00
|
|
|
to adjust this setting to your needs.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Maximum size of memory mapped by the startup code of
|
|
|
|
the Linux kernel; all data that must be processed by
|
2008-04-14 13:44:16 +00:00
|
|
|
the Linux kernel (bd_info, boot arguments, FDT blob if
|
|
|
|
used) must be put below this limit, unless "bootm_low"
|
2013-09-16 11:15:45 +00:00
|
|
|
environment variable is defined and non-zero. In such case
|
2008-04-14 13:44:16 +00:00
|
|
|
all data for the Linux kernel must be between "bootm_low"
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
and "bootm_low" + CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ. The environment
|
2011-03-28 09:58:43 +00:00
|
|
|
variable "bootm_mapsize" will override the value of
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ. If CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ is undefined,
|
|
|
|
then the value in "bootm_size" will be used instead.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2010-10-13 19:57:35 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_RAMDISK_HIGH:
|
|
|
|
Enable initrd_high functionality. If defined then the
|
|
|
|
initrd_high feature is enabled and the bootm ramdisk subcommand
|
|
|
|
is enabled.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_GET_CMDLINE:
|
|
|
|
Enables allocating and saving kernel cmdline in space between
|
|
|
|
"bootm_low" and "bootm_low" + BOOTMAPSZ.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_GET_KBD:
|
|
|
|
Enables allocating and saving a kernel copy of the bd_info in
|
|
|
|
space between "bootm_low" and "bootm_low" + BOOTMAPSZ.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_BANKS:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Max number of Flash memory banks
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_SECT:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Max number of sectors on a Flash chip
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_ERASE_TOUT:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Timeout for Flash erase operations (in ms)
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_WRITE_TOUT:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Timeout for Flash write operations (in ms)
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_LOCK_TOUT
|
2003-07-14 22:13:32 +00:00
|
|
|
Timeout for Flash set sector lock bit operation (in ms)
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_UNLOCK_TOUT
|
2003-07-14 22:13:32 +00:00
|
|
|
Timeout for Flash clear lock bits operation (in ms)
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_PROTECTION
|
2003-07-14 22:13:32 +00:00
|
|
|
If defined, hardware flash sectors protection is used
|
|
|
|
instead of U-Boot software protection.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_DIRECT_FLASH_TFTP:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enable TFTP transfers directly to flash memory;
|
|
|
|
without this option such a download has to be
|
|
|
|
performed in two steps: (1) download to RAM, and (2)
|
|
|
|
copy from RAM to flash.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The two-step approach is usually more reliable, since
|
|
|
|
you can check if the download worked before you erase
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
the flash, but in some situations (when system RAM is
|
|
|
|
too limited to allow for a temporary copy of the
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
downloaded image) this option may be very useful.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_CFI:
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Define if the flash driver uses extra elements in the
|
2004-02-08 22:55:38 +00:00
|
|
|
common flash structure for storing flash geometry.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-08-12 23:40:42 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_DRIVER
|
2004-02-08 22:55:38 +00:00
|
|
|
This option also enables the building of the cfi_flash driver
|
|
|
|
in the drivers directory
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-11-17 14:57:58 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_MTD
|
|
|
|
This option enables the building of the cfi_mtd driver
|
|
|
|
in the drivers directory. The driver exports CFI flash
|
|
|
|
to the MTD layer.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_USE_BUFFER_WRITE
|
2008-04-03 11:36:02 +00:00
|
|
|
Use buffered writes to flash.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_FLASH_SPANSION_S29WS_N
|
|
|
|
s29ws-n MirrorBit flash has non-standard addresses for buffered
|
|
|
|
write commands.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_QUIET_TEST
|
2005-11-22 12:20:42 +00:00
|
|
|
If this option is defined, the common CFI flash doesn't
|
|
|
|
print it's warning upon not recognized FLASH banks. This
|
|
|
|
is useful, if some of the configured banks are only
|
|
|
|
optionally available.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-03-08 18:48:01 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_FLASH_SHOW_PROGRESS
|
|
|
|
If defined (must be an integer), print out countdown
|
|
|
|
digits and dots. Recommended value: 45 (9..1) for 80
|
|
|
|
column displays, 15 (3..1) for 40 column displays.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-04 13:53:14 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_FLASH_VERIFY
|
|
|
|
If defined, the content of the flash (destination) is compared
|
|
|
|
against the source after the write operation. An error message
|
|
|
|
will be printed when the contents are not identical.
|
|
|
|
Please note that this option is useless in nearly all cases,
|
|
|
|
since such flash programming errors usually are detected earlier
|
|
|
|
while unprotecting/erasing/programming. Please only enable
|
|
|
|
this option if you really know what you are doing.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_RX_ETH_BUFFER:
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
Defines the number of Ethernet receive buffers. On some
|
|
|
|
Ethernet controllers it is recommended to set this value
|
2003-06-05 15:39:44 +00:00
|
|
|
to 8 or even higher (EEPRO100 or 405 EMAC), since all
|
|
|
|
buffers can be full shortly after enabling the interface
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
on high Ethernet traffic.
|
2003-06-05 15:39:44 +00:00
|
|
|
Defaults to 4 if not defined.
|
|
|
|
|
New implementation for internal handling of environment variables.
Motivation:
* Old environment code used a pessimizing implementation:
- variable lookup used linear search => slow
- changed/added variables were added at the end, i. e. most
frequently used variables had the slowest access times => slow
- each setenv() would calculate the CRC32 checksum over the whole
environment block => slow
* "redundant" envrionment was locked down to two copies
* No easy way to implement features like "reset to factory defaults",
or to select one out of several pre-defined (previously saved) sets
of environment settings ("profiles")
* No easy way to import or export environment settings
======================================================================
API Changes:
- Variable names starting with '#' are no longer allowed
I didn't find any such variable names being used; it is highly
recommended to follow standard conventions and start variable names
with an alphanumeric character
- "printenv" will now print a backslash at the end of all but the last
lines of a multi-line variable value.
Multi-line variables have never been formally defined, allthough
there is no reason not to use them. Now we define rules how to deal
with them, allowing for import and export.
- Function forceenv() and the related code in saveenv() was removed.
At the moment this is causing build problems for the only user of
this code (schmoogie - which has no entry in MAINTAINERS); may be
fixed later by implementing the "env set -f" feature.
Inconsistencies:
- "printenv" will '\\'-escape the '\n' in multi-line variables, while
"printenv var" will not do that.
======================================================================
Advantages:
- "printenv" output much better readable (sorted)
- faster!
- extendable (additional variable properties can be added)
- new, powerful features like "factory reset" or easy switching
between several different environment settings ("profiles")
Disadvantages:
- Image size grows by typically 5...7 KiB (might shrink a bit again on
systems with redundant environment with a following patch series)
======================================================================
Implemented:
- env command with subcommands:
- env print [arg ...]
same as "printenv": print environment
- env set [-f] name [arg ...]
same as "setenv": set (and delete) environment variables
["-f" - force setting even for read-only variables - not
implemented yet.]
- end delete [-f] name
not implemented yet
["-f" - force delete even for read-only variables]
- env save
same as "saveenv": save environment
- env export [-t | -b | -c] addr [size]
export internal representation (hash table) in formats usable for
persistent storage or processing:
-t: export as text format; if size is given, data will be
padded with '\0' bytes; if not, one terminating '\0'
will be added (which is included in the "filesize"
setting so you can for exmple copy this to flash and
keep the termination).
-b: export as binary format (name=value pairs separated by
'\0', list end marked by double "\0\0")
-c: export as checksum protected environment format as
used for example by "saveenv" command
addr: memory address where environment gets stored
size: size of output buffer
With "-c" and size is NOT given, then the export command will
format the data as currently used for the persistent storage,
i. e. it will use CONFIG_ENV_SECT_SIZE as output block size and
prepend a valid CRC32 checksum and, in case of resundant
environment, a "current" redundancy flag. If size is given, this
value will be used instead of CONFIG_ENV_SECT_SIZE; again, CRC32
checksum and redundancy flag will be inserted.
With "-b" and "-t", always only the real data (including a
terminating '\0' byte) will be written; here the optional size
argument will be used to make sure not to overflow the user
provided buffer; the command will abort if the size is not
sufficient. Any remainign space will be '\0' padded.
On successful return, the variable "filesize" will be set.
Note that filesize includes the trailing/terminating '\0'
byte(s).
Usage szenario: create a text snapshot/backup of the current
settings:
=> env export -t 100000
=> era ${backup_addr} +${filesize}
=> cp.b 100000 ${backup_addr} ${filesize}
Re-import this snapshot, deleting all other settings:
=> env import -d -t ${backup_addr}
- env import [-d] [-t | -b | -c] addr [size]
import external format (text or binary) into hash table,
optionally deleting existing values:
-d: delete existing environment before importing;
otherwise overwrite / append to existion definitions
-t: assume text format; either "size" must be given or the
text data must be '\0' terminated
-b: assume binary format ('\0' separated, "\0\0" terminated)
-c: assume checksum protected environment format
addr: memory address to read from
size: length of input data; if missing, proper '\0'
termination is mandatory
- env default -f
reset default environment: drop all environment settings and load
default environment
- env ask name [message] [size]
same as "askenv": ask for environment variable
- env edit name
same as "editenv": edit environment variable
- env run
same as "run": run commands in an environment variable
======================================================================
TODO:
- drop default env as implemented now; provide a text file based
initialization instead (eventually using several text files to
incrementally build it from common blocks) and a tool to convert it
into a binary blob / object file.
- It would be nice if we could add wildcard support for environment
variables; this is needed for variable name auto-completion,
but it would also be nice to be able to say "printenv ip*" or
"printenv *addr*"
- Some boards don't link any more due to the grown code size:
DU405, canyonlands, sequoia, socrates.
=> cc: Matthias Fuchs <matthias.fuchs@esd-electronics.com>,
Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de>,
Heiko Schocher <hs@denx.de>
- Dropping forceenv() causes build problems on schmoogie
=> cc: Sergey Kubushyn <ksi@koi8.net>
- Build tested on PPC and ARM only; runtime tested with NOR and NAND
flash only => needs testing!!
Signed-off-by: Wolfgang Denk <wd@denx.de>
Cc: Matthias Fuchs <matthias.fuchs@esd-electronics.com>,
Cc: Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de>,
Cc: Heiko Schocher <hs@denx.de>
Cc: Sergey Kubushyn <ksi@koi8.net>
2010-06-20 21:33:59 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_MAX_ENTRIES
|
|
|
|
|
2010-10-27 20:48:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Maximum number of entries in the hash table that is used
|
|
|
|
internally to store the environment settings. The default
|
|
|
|
setting is supposed to be generous and should work in most
|
|
|
|
cases. This setting can be used to tune behaviour; see
|
|
|
|
lib/hashtable.c for details.
|
New implementation for internal handling of environment variables.
Motivation:
* Old environment code used a pessimizing implementation:
- variable lookup used linear search => slow
- changed/added variables were added at the end, i. e. most
frequently used variables had the slowest access times => slow
- each setenv() would calculate the CRC32 checksum over the whole
environment block => slow
* "redundant" envrionment was locked down to two copies
* No easy way to implement features like "reset to factory defaults",
or to select one out of several pre-defined (previously saved) sets
of environment settings ("profiles")
* No easy way to import or export environment settings
======================================================================
API Changes:
- Variable names starting with '#' are no longer allowed
I didn't find any such variable names being used; it is highly
recommended to follow standard conventions and start variable names
with an alphanumeric character
- "printenv" will now print a backslash at the end of all but the last
lines of a multi-line variable value.
Multi-line variables have never been formally defined, allthough
there is no reason not to use them. Now we define rules how to deal
with them, allowing for import and export.
- Function forceenv() and the related code in saveenv() was removed.
At the moment this is causing build problems for the only user of
this code (schmoogie - which has no entry in MAINTAINERS); may be
fixed later by implementing the "env set -f" feature.
Inconsistencies:
- "printenv" will '\\'-escape the '\n' in multi-line variables, while
"printenv var" will not do that.
======================================================================
Advantages:
- "printenv" output much better readable (sorted)
- faster!
- extendable (additional variable properties can be added)
- new, powerful features like "factory reset" or easy switching
between several different environment settings ("profiles")
Disadvantages:
- Image size grows by typically 5...7 KiB (might shrink a bit again on
systems with redundant environment with a following patch series)
======================================================================
Implemented:
- env command with subcommands:
- env print [arg ...]
same as "printenv": print environment
- env set [-f] name [arg ...]
same as "setenv": set (and delete) environment variables
["-f" - force setting even for read-only variables - not
implemented yet.]
- end delete [-f] name
not implemented yet
["-f" - force delete even for read-only variables]
- env save
same as "saveenv": save environment
- env export [-t | -b | -c] addr [size]
export internal representation (hash table) in formats usable for
persistent storage or processing:
-t: export as text format; if size is given, data will be
padded with '\0' bytes; if not, one terminating '\0'
will be added (which is included in the "filesize"
setting so you can for exmple copy this to flash and
keep the termination).
-b: export as binary format (name=value pairs separated by
'\0', list end marked by double "\0\0")
-c: export as checksum protected environment format as
used for example by "saveenv" command
addr: memory address where environment gets stored
size: size of output buffer
With "-c" and size is NOT given, then the export command will
format the data as currently used for the persistent storage,
i. e. it will use CONFIG_ENV_SECT_SIZE as output block size and
prepend a valid CRC32 checksum and, in case of resundant
environment, a "current" redundancy flag. If size is given, this
value will be used instead of CONFIG_ENV_SECT_SIZE; again, CRC32
checksum and redundancy flag will be inserted.
With "-b" and "-t", always only the real data (including a
terminating '\0' byte) will be written; here the optional size
argument will be used to make sure not to overflow the user
provided buffer; the command will abort if the size is not
sufficient. Any remainign space will be '\0' padded.
On successful return, the variable "filesize" will be set.
Note that filesize includes the trailing/terminating '\0'
byte(s).
Usage szenario: create a text snapshot/backup of the current
settings:
=> env export -t 100000
=> era ${backup_addr} +${filesize}
=> cp.b 100000 ${backup_addr} ${filesize}
Re-import this snapshot, deleting all other settings:
=> env import -d -t ${backup_addr}
- env import [-d] [-t | -b | -c] addr [size]
import external format (text or binary) into hash table,
optionally deleting existing values:
-d: delete existing environment before importing;
otherwise overwrite / append to existion definitions
-t: assume text format; either "size" must be given or the
text data must be '\0' terminated
-b: assume binary format ('\0' separated, "\0\0" terminated)
-c: assume checksum protected environment format
addr: memory address to read from
size: length of input data; if missing, proper '\0'
termination is mandatory
- env default -f
reset default environment: drop all environment settings and load
default environment
- env ask name [message] [size]
same as "askenv": ask for environment variable
- env edit name
same as "editenv": edit environment variable
- env run
same as "run": run commands in an environment variable
======================================================================
TODO:
- drop default env as implemented now; provide a text file based
initialization instead (eventually using several text files to
incrementally build it from common blocks) and a tool to convert it
into a binary blob / object file.
- It would be nice if we could add wildcard support for environment
variables; this is needed for variable name auto-completion,
but it would also be nice to be able to say "printenv ip*" or
"printenv *addr*"
- Some boards don't link any more due to the grown code size:
DU405, canyonlands, sequoia, socrates.
=> cc: Matthias Fuchs <matthias.fuchs@esd-electronics.com>,
Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de>,
Heiko Schocher <hs@denx.de>
- Dropping forceenv() causes build problems on schmoogie
=> cc: Sergey Kubushyn <ksi@koi8.net>
- Build tested on PPC and ARM only; runtime tested with NOR and NAND
flash only => needs testing!!
Signed-off-by: Wolfgang Denk <wd@denx.de>
Cc: Matthias Fuchs <matthias.fuchs@esd-electronics.com>,
Cc: Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de>,
Cc: Heiko Schocher <hs@denx.de>
Cc: Sergey Kubushyn <ksi@koi8.net>
2010-06-20 21:33:59 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-12-12 04:16:31 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_DEFAULT
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC
|
2013-09-16 11:15:45 +00:00
|
|
|
Enable validation of the values given to environment variables when
|
2012-12-12 04:16:31 +00:00
|
|
|
calling env set. Variables can be restricted to only decimal,
|
|
|
|
hexadecimal, or boolean. If CONFIG_CMD_NET is also defined,
|
|
|
|
the variables can also be restricted to IP address or MAC address.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The format of the list is:
|
|
|
|
type_attribute = [s|d|x|b|i|m]
|
2012-12-12 04:16:34 +00:00
|
|
|
access_atribute = [a|r|o|c]
|
|
|
|
attributes = type_attribute[access_atribute]
|
2012-12-12 04:16:31 +00:00
|
|
|
entry = variable_name[:attributes]
|
|
|
|
list = entry[,list]
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The type attributes are:
|
|
|
|
s - String (default)
|
|
|
|
d - Decimal
|
|
|
|
x - Hexadecimal
|
|
|
|
b - Boolean ([1yYtT|0nNfF])
|
|
|
|
i - IP address
|
|
|
|
m - MAC address
|
|
|
|
|
2012-12-12 04:16:34 +00:00
|
|
|
The access attributes are:
|
|
|
|
a - Any (default)
|
|
|
|
r - Read-only
|
|
|
|
o - Write-once
|
|
|
|
c - Change-default
|
|
|
|
|
2012-12-12 04:16:31 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_DEFAULT
|
|
|
|
Define this to a list (string) to define the ".flags"
|
|
|
|
envirnoment variable in the default or embedded environment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC
|
|
|
|
Define this to a list (string) to define validation that
|
|
|
|
should be done if an entry is not found in the ".flags"
|
|
|
|
environment variable. To override a setting in the static
|
|
|
|
list, simply add an entry for the same variable name to the
|
|
|
|
".flags" variable.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-12-12 04:16:34 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_ACCESS_IGNORE_FORCE
|
|
|
|
If defined, don't allow the -f switch to env set override variable
|
|
|
|
access flags.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-03-08 13:45:27 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_GENERIC_BOARD
|
|
|
|
This selects the architecture-generic board system instead of the
|
|
|
|
architecture-specific board files. It is intended to move boards
|
|
|
|
to this new framework over time. Defining this will disable the
|
|
|
|
arch/foo/lib/board.c file and use common/board_f.c and
|
|
|
|
common/board_r.c instead. To use this option your architecture
|
|
|
|
must support it (i.e. must define __HAVE_ARCH_GENERIC_BOARD in
|
|
|
|
its config.mk file). If you find problems enabling this option on
|
|
|
|
your board please report the problem and send patches!
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-17 20:49:40 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_OMAP_PLATFORM_RESET_TIME_MAX_USEC (OMAP only)
|
|
|
|
This is set by OMAP boards for the max time that reset should
|
|
|
|
be asserted. See doc/README.omap-reset-time for details on how
|
|
|
|
the value can be calulated on a given board.
|
2013-03-11 07:06:48 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
The following definitions that deal with the placement and management
|
|
|
|
of environment data (variable area); in general, we support the
|
|
|
|
following configurations:
|
|
|
|
|
2011-07-08 10:44:25 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_BUILD_ENVCRC:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Builds up envcrc with the target environment so that external utils
|
|
|
|
may easily extract it and embed it in final U-Boot images.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-09-10 20:48:04 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_FLASH:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this if the environment is in flash memory.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
a) The environment occupies one whole flash sector, which is
|
|
|
|
"embedded" in the text segment with the U-Boot code. This
|
|
|
|
happens usually with "bottom boot sector" or "top boot
|
|
|
|
sector" type flash chips, which have several smaller
|
|
|
|
sectors at the start or the end. For instance, such a
|
|
|
|
layout can have sector sizes of 8, 2x4, 16, Nx32 kB. In
|
|
|
|
such a case you would place the environment in one of the
|
|
|
|
4 kB sectors - with U-Boot code before and after it. With
|
|
|
|
"top boot sector" type flash chips, you would put the
|
|
|
|
environment in one of the last sectors, leaving a gap
|
|
|
|
between U-Boot and the environment.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-09-10 20:48:06 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Offset of environment data (variable area) to the
|
|
|
|
beginning of flash memory; for instance, with bottom boot
|
|
|
|
type flash chips the second sector can be used: the offset
|
|
|
|
for this sector is given here.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET is used relative to CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-09-10 20:48:06 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_ADDR:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is just another way to specify the start address of
|
|
|
|
the flash sector containing the environment (instead of
|
2008-09-10 20:48:06 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET).
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-09-10 20:48:06 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_SECT_SIZE:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Size of the sector containing the environment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
b) Sometimes flash chips have few, equal sized, BIG sectors.
|
|
|
|
In such a case you don't want to spend a whole sector for
|
|
|
|
the environment.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-09-10 20:48:06 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_SIZE:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-09-10 20:48:04 +00:00
|
|
|
If you use this in combination with CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_FLASH
|
2008-09-10 20:48:06 +00:00
|
|
|
and CONFIG_ENV_SECT_SIZE, you can specify to use only a part
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
of this flash sector for the environment. This saves
|
|
|
|
memory for the RAM copy of the environment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
It may also save flash memory if you decide to use this
|
|
|
|
when your environment is "embedded" within U-Boot code,
|
|
|
|
since then the remainder of the flash sector could be used
|
|
|
|
for U-Boot code. It should be pointed out that this is
|
|
|
|
STRONGLY DISCOURAGED from a robustness point of view:
|
|
|
|
updating the environment in flash makes it always
|
|
|
|
necessary to erase the WHOLE sector. If something goes
|
|
|
|
wrong before the contents has been restored from a copy in
|
|
|
|
RAM, your target system will be dead.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-09-10 20:48:06 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_ADDR_REDUND
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_ENV_SIZE_REDUND
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
These settings describe a second storage area used to hold
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
a redundant copy of the environment data, so that there is
|
2003-04-05 00:53:31 +00:00
|
|
|
a valid backup copy in case there is a power failure during
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
a "saveenv" operation.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
BE CAREFUL! Any changes to the flash layout, and some changes to the
|
|
|
|
source code will make it necessary to adapt <board>/u-boot.lds*
|
|
|
|
accordingly!
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2008-09-10 20:47:59 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_NVRAM:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this if you have some non-volatile memory device
|
|
|
|
(NVRAM, battery buffered SRAM) which you want to use for the
|
|
|
|
environment.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-09-10 20:48:06 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_ADDR:
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_SIZE:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
These two #defines are used to determine the memory area you
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
want to use for environment. It is assumed that this memory
|
|
|
|
can just be read and written to, without any special
|
|
|
|
provision.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
BE CAREFUL! The first access to the environment happens quite early
|
|
|
|
in U-Boot initalization (when we try to get the setting of for the
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
console baudrate). You *MUST* have mapped your NVRAM area then, or
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot will hang.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note that even with NVRAM we still use a copy of the
|
|
|
|
environment in RAM: we could work on NVRAM directly, but we want to
|
|
|
|
keep settings there always unmodified except somebody uses "saveenv"
|
|
|
|
to save the current settings.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2008-09-05 07:19:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_EEPROM:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Use this if you have an EEPROM or similar serial access
|
|
|
|
device and a driver for it.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-09-10 20:48:06 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET:
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_SIZE:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
These two #defines specify the offset and size of the
|
|
|
|
environment area within the total memory of your EEPROM.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_EEPROM_ADDR:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
If defined, specified the chip address of the EEPROM device.
|
|
|
|
The default address is zero.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_EEPROM_PAGE_WRITE_BITS:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
If defined, the number of bits used to address bytes in a
|
|
|
|
single page in the EEPROM device. A 64 byte page, for example
|
|
|
|
would require six bits.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_EEPROM_PAGE_WRITE_DELAY_MS:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
If defined, the number of milliseconds to delay between
|
2004-02-06 23:19:44 +00:00
|
|
|
page writes. The default is zero milliseconds.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_EEPROM_ADDR_LEN:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
The length in bytes of the EEPROM memory array address. Note
|
|
|
|
that this is NOT the chip address length!
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_EEPROM_ADDR_OVERFLOW:
|
2004-04-23 20:32:05 +00:00
|
|
|
EEPROM chips that implement "address overflow" are ones
|
|
|
|
like Catalyst 24WC04/08/16 which has 9/10/11 bits of
|
|
|
|
address and the extra bits end up in the "chip address" bit
|
|
|
|
slots. This makes a 24WC08 (1Kbyte) chip look like four 256
|
|
|
|
byte chips.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that we consider the length of the address field to
|
|
|
|
still be one byte because the extra address bits are hidden
|
|
|
|
in the chip address.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_EEPROM_SIZE:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
The size in bytes of the EEPROM device.
|
|
|
|
|
2010-01-07 07:55:40 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_EEPROM_IS_ON_I2C
|
|
|
|
define this, if you have I2C and SPI activated, and your
|
|
|
|
EEPROM, which holds the environment, is on the I2C bus.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_I2C_ENV_EEPROM_BUS
|
|
|
|
if you have an Environment on an EEPROM reached over
|
|
|
|
I2C muxes, you can define here, how to reach this
|
|
|
|
EEPROM. For example:
|
|
|
|
|
2013-01-29 07:53:15 +00:00
|
|
|
#define CONFIG_I2C_ENV_EEPROM_BUS 1
|
2010-01-07 07:55:40 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
EEPROM which holds the environment, is reached over
|
|
|
|
a pca9547 i2c mux with address 0x70, channel 3.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-09-10 20:47:58 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_DATAFLASH:
|
2003-12-06 23:55:10 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-01-02 14:00:00 +00:00
|
|
|
Define this if you have a DataFlash memory device which you
|
2003-12-06 23:55:10 +00:00
|
|
|
want to use for the environment.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-09-10 20:48:06 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET:
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_ADDR:
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_SIZE:
|
2003-12-06 23:55:10 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
These three #defines specify the offset and size of the
|
|
|
|
environment area within the total memory of your DataFlash placed
|
|
|
|
at the specified address.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-07-01 11:30:13 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_SPI_FLASH:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this if you have a SPI Flash memory device which you
|
|
|
|
want to use for the environment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET:
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_SIZE:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
These two #defines specify the offset and size of the
|
|
|
|
environment area within the SPI Flash. CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET must be
|
|
|
|
aligned to an erase sector boundary.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_SECT_SIZE:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define the SPI flash's sector size.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET_REDUND (optional):
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This setting describes a second storage area of CONFIG_ENV_SIZE
|
|
|
|
size used to hold a redundant copy of the environment data, so
|
|
|
|
that there is a valid backup copy in case there is a power failure
|
|
|
|
during a "saveenv" operation. CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET_RENDUND must be
|
|
|
|
aligned to an erase sector boundary.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_SPI_BUS (optional):
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_SPI_CS (optional):
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define the SPI bus and chip select. If not defined they will be 0.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_SPI_MAX_HZ (optional):
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define the SPI max work clock. If not defined then use 1MHz.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_SPI_MODE (optional):
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define the SPI work mode. If not defined then use SPI_MODE_3.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-03-08 00:33:20 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_REMOTE:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this if you have a remote memory space which you
|
|
|
|
want to use for the local device's environment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_ADDR:
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_SIZE:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
These two #defines specify the address and size of the
|
|
|
|
environment area within the remote memory space. The
|
|
|
|
local device can get the environment from remote memory
|
2012-08-09 05:10:01 +00:00
|
|
|
space by SRIO or PCIE links.
|
2012-03-08 00:33:20 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
BE CAREFUL! For some special cases, the local device can not use
|
|
|
|
"saveenv" command. For example, the local device will get the
|
2012-08-09 05:10:01 +00:00
|
|
|
environment stored in a remote NOR flash by SRIO or PCIE link,
|
|
|
|
but it can not erase, write this NOR flash by SRIO or PCIE interface.
|
2012-03-08 00:33:20 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-09-10 20:47:58 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_NAND:
|
2004-06-09 14:58:14 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this if you have a NAND device which you want to use
|
|
|
|
for the environment.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-09-10 20:48:06 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET:
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_SIZE:
|
2004-06-09 14:58:14 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
These two #defines specify the offset and size of the environment
|
2010-09-17 19:38:37 +00:00
|
|
|
area within the first NAND device. CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET must be
|
|
|
|
aligned to an erase block boundary.
|
2003-12-06 23:55:10 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2010-09-17 19:38:37 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET_REDUND (optional):
|
2006-03-20 17:02:44 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-09-10 20:48:06 +00:00
|
|
|
This setting describes a second storage area of CONFIG_ENV_SIZE
|
2010-09-17 19:38:37 +00:00
|
|
|
size used to hold a redundant copy of the environment data, so
|
|
|
|
that there is a valid backup copy in case there is a power failure
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
during a "saveenv" operation. CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET_RENDUND must be
|
2010-09-17 19:38:37 +00:00
|
|
|
aligned to an erase block boundary.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_RANGE (optional):
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Specifies the length of the region in which the environment
|
|
|
|
can be written. This should be a multiple of the NAND device's
|
|
|
|
block size. Specifying a range with more erase blocks than
|
|
|
|
are needed to hold CONFIG_ENV_SIZE allows bad blocks within
|
|
|
|
the range to be avoided.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET_OOB (optional):
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enables support for dynamically retrieving the offset of the
|
|
|
|
environment from block zero's out-of-band data. The
|
|
|
|
"nand env.oob" command can be used to record this offset.
|
|
|
|
Currently, CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET_REDUND is not supported when
|
|
|
|
using CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET_OOB.
|
2006-03-20 17:02:44 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2009-05-18 14:07:22 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_NAND_ENV_DST
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defines address in RAM to which the nand_spl code should copy the
|
|
|
|
environment. If redundant environment is used, it will be copied to
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_NAND_ENV_DST + CONFIG_ENV_SIZE.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-08 10:32:51 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_UBI:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this if you have an UBI volume that you want to use for the
|
|
|
|
environment. This has the benefit of wear-leveling the environment
|
|
|
|
accesses, which is important on NAND.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_UBI_PART:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this to a string that is the mtd partition containing the UBI.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_UBI_VOLUME:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this to the name of the volume that you want to store the
|
|
|
|
environment in.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-08 10:32:52 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_UBI_VOLUME_REDUND:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this to the name of another volume to store a second copy of
|
|
|
|
the environment in. This will enable redundant environments in UBI.
|
|
|
|
It is assumed that both volumes are in the same MTD partition.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-08 10:32:51 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_UBI_SILENCE_MSG
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_UBIFS_SILENCE_MSG
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You will probably want to define these to avoid a really noisy system
|
|
|
|
when storing the env in UBI.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-06-24 09:31:03 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_FAT:
|
|
|
|
Define this if you want to use the FAT file system for the environment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- FAT_ENV_INTERFACE:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this to a string that is the name of the block device.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- FAT_ENV_DEV_AND_PART:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this to a string to specify the partition of the device. It can
|
|
|
|
be as following:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
"D:P", "D:0", "D", "D:" or "D:auto" (D, P are integers. And P >= 1)
|
|
|
|
- "D:P": device D partition P. Error occurs if device D has no
|
|
|
|
partition table.
|
|
|
|
- "D:0": device D.
|
|
|
|
- "D" or "D:": device D partition 1 if device D has partition
|
|
|
|
table, or the whole device D if has no partition
|
|
|
|
table.
|
|
|
|
- "D:auto": first partition in device D with bootable flag set.
|
|
|
|
If none, first valid paratition in device D. If no
|
|
|
|
partition table then means device D.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- FAT_ENV_FILE:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
It's a string of the FAT file name. This file use to store the
|
|
|
|
envrionment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_FAT_WRITE:
|
|
|
|
This should be defined. Otherwise it cannot save the envrionment file.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-06-11 21:14:00 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_MMC:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this if you have an MMC device which you want to use for the
|
|
|
|
environment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MMC_ENV_DEV:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Specifies which MMC device the environment is stored in.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MMC_ENV_PART (optional):
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Specifies which MMC partition the environment is stored in. If not
|
|
|
|
set, defaults to partition 0, the user area. Common values might be
|
|
|
|
1 (first MMC boot partition), 2 (second MMC boot partition).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET:
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_SIZE:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
These two #defines specify the offset and size of the environment
|
|
|
|
area within the specified MMC device.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-06-11 21:14:02 +00:00
|
|
|
If offset is positive (the usual case), it is treated as relative to
|
|
|
|
the start of the MMC partition. If offset is negative, it is treated
|
|
|
|
as relative to the end of the MMC partition. This can be useful if
|
|
|
|
your board may be fitted with different MMC devices, which have
|
|
|
|
different sizes for the MMC partitions, and you always want the
|
|
|
|
environment placed at the very end of the partition, to leave the
|
|
|
|
maximum possible space before it, to store other data.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-06-11 21:14:00 +00:00
|
|
|
These two values are in units of bytes, but must be aligned to an
|
|
|
|
MMC sector boundary.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET_REDUND (optional):
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Specifies a second storage area, of CONFIG_ENV_SIZE size, used to
|
|
|
|
hold a redundant copy of the environment data. This provides a
|
|
|
|
valid backup copy in case the other copy is corrupted, e.g. due
|
|
|
|
to a power failure during a "saveenv" operation.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-06-11 21:14:02 +00:00
|
|
|
This value may also be positive or negative; this is handled in the
|
|
|
|
same way as CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-06-11 21:14:00 +00:00
|
|
|
This value is also in units of bytes, but must also be aligned to
|
|
|
|
an MMC sector boundary.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_SIZE_REDUND (optional):
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This value need not be set, even when CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET_REDUND is
|
|
|
|
set. If this value is set, it must be set to the same value as
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_ENV_SIZE.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SPI_INIT_OFFSET
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defines offset to the initial SPI buffer area in DPRAM. The
|
|
|
|
area is used at an early stage (ROM part) if the environment
|
|
|
|
is configured to reside in the SPI EEPROM: We need a 520 byte
|
|
|
|
scratch DPRAM area. It is used between the two initialization
|
|
|
|
calls (spi_init_f() and spi_init_r()). A value of 0xB00 seems
|
|
|
|
to be a good choice since it makes it far enough from the
|
|
|
|
start of the data area as well as from the stack pointer.
|
|
|
|
|
2007-11-02 20:15:42 +00:00
|
|
|
Please note that the environment is read-only until the monitor
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
has been relocated to RAM and a RAM copy of the environment has been
|
Rename getenv_r() into getenv_f()
While running from flash, i. e. before relocation, we have only a
limited C runtime environment without writable data segment. In this
phase, some configurations (for example with environment in EEPROM)
must not use the normal getenv(), but a special function. This
function had been called getenv_r(), with the idea that the "_r"
suffix would mean the same as in the _r_eentrant versions of some of
the C library functions (for example getdate vs. getdate_r, getgrent
vs. getgrent_r, etc.).
Unfortunately this was a misleading name, as in U-Boot the "_r"
generally means "running from RAM", i. e. _after_ relocation.
To avoid confusion, rename into getenv_f() [as "running from flash"]
Signed-off-by: Wolfgang Denk <wd@denx.de>
Acked-by: Detlev Zundel <dzu@denx.de>
2010-07-24 19:55:43 +00:00
|
|
|
created; also, when using EEPROM you will have to use getenv_f()
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
until then to read environment variables.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-31 16:34:49 +00:00
|
|
|
The environment is protected by a CRC32 checksum. Before the monitor
|
|
|
|
is relocated into RAM, as a result of a bad CRC you will be working
|
|
|
|
with the compiled-in default environment - *silently*!!! [This is
|
|
|
|
necessary, because the first environment variable we need is the
|
|
|
|
"baudrate" setting for the console - if we have a bad CRC, we don't
|
|
|
|
have any device yet where we could complain.]
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: once the monitor has been relocated, then it will complain if
|
|
|
|
the default environment is used; a new CRC is computed as soon as you
|
2003-03-31 16:34:49 +00:00
|
|
|
use the "saveenv" command to store a valid environment.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_ECHO_LINK_DOWN:
|
2003-10-15 23:53:47 +00:00
|
|
|
Echo the inverted Ethernet link state to the fault LED.
|
2003-10-08 22:33:00 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
Note: If this option is active, then CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_MII_ADDR
|
2003-10-08 22:33:00 +00:00
|
|
|
also needs to be defined.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_MII_ADDR:
|
2003-10-15 23:53:47 +00:00
|
|
|
MII address of the PHY to check for the Ethernet link state.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2009-02-18 22:30:44 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_NS16550_MIN_FUNCTIONS:
|
|
|
|
Define this if you desire to only have use of the NS16550_init
|
|
|
|
and NS16550_putc functions for the serial driver located at
|
|
|
|
drivers/serial/ns16550.c. This option is useful for saving
|
|
|
|
space for already greatly restricted images, including but not
|
|
|
|
limited to NAND_SPL configurations.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-11-30 13:01:18 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO
|
|
|
|
Display information about the board that U-Boot is running on
|
|
|
|
when U-Boot starts up. The board function checkboard() is called
|
|
|
|
to do this.
|
|
|
|
|
arm: Add CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO_LATE to display board info on LCD
This option displays board info after stdio is running, so that it will
appear on the LCD. If it is displayed earlier, the board info will appear
on the serial console but not on the LCD.
Here follows a blow-by-blow description.
1a. Without CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO_LATE, on serial:
U-Boot 2011.12-02550-g037e1c5-dirty (Nov 15 2012 - 14:29:42) for SMDK5250
CPU: S5PC520 @ 1700MHz
Board: Google Snow, rev 0
I2C: ready
DRAM: 2 GiB Elpida DDR3 @ 800MHz
MMC: S5P MSHC0: 0, S5P MSHC1: 1
SF: Detected W25Q32 with page size 4 KiB, total 4 MiB
*** Warning - bad CRC, using default environment
In: mkbp-keyb
Out: lcd
Err: lcd
Net: No ethernet found.
Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0
SMDK5250 #
1b. Without CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO_LATE, on LCD (note machine info
is missing):
In: mkbp-keyb
Out: lcd
Err: lcd
Net: No ethernet found.
Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0
SMDK5250 #
2a. With CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO_LATE, on serial:
U-Boot 2011.12-02550-g037e1c5 (Nov 15 2012 - 14:27:40) for SMDK5250
CPU: S5PC520 @ 1700MHz
I2C: ready
DRAM: 2 GiB Elpida DDR3 @ 800MHz
MMC: S5P MSHC0: 0, S5P MSHC1: 1
SF: Detected W25Q32 with page size 4 KiB, total 4 MiB
*** Warning - bad CRC, using default environment
Model: Google Snow
In: mkbp-keyb
Out: lcd
Err: lcd
Net: No ethernet found.
Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0
SMDK5250 #
2b. With CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO_LATE, on LCD (note machine info is present):
Model: Google Snow
In: mkbp-keyb
Out: lcd
Err: lcd
Net: No ethernet found.
Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0
SMDK5250 #
Since the LCD is all that a typical user sees, it is useful to display
the model there.
We may be able to rearrange things some other way one day, but at
present this seems like a convenient way of getting the required
behaviour.
Signed-off-by: Simon Glass <sjg@chromium.org>
2012-11-30 13:01:19 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO_LATE
|
|
|
|
Similar to the previous option, but display this information
|
|
|
|
later, once stdio is running and output goes to the LCD, if
|
|
|
|
present.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-08-11 14:40:43 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_BOARD_SIZE_LIMIT:
|
|
|
|
Maximum size of the U-Boot image. When defined, the
|
|
|
|
build system checks that the actual size does not
|
|
|
|
exceed it.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Low Level (hardware related) configuration options:
|
2003-03-26 06:55:25 +00:00
|
|
|
---------------------------------------------------
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CACHELINE_SIZE:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Cache Line Size of the CPU.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_DEFAULT_IMMR:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Default address of the IMMR after system reset.
|
2003-07-17 23:16:40 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-10-15 23:53:47 +00:00
|
|
|
Needed on some 8260 systems (MPC8260ADS, PQ2FADS-ZU,
|
|
|
|
and RPXsuper) to be able to adjust the position of
|
|
|
|
the IMMR register after a reset.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-08-04 23:03:41 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT:
|
|
|
|
Default (power-on reset) physical address of CCSR on Freescale
|
|
|
|
PowerPC SOCs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR:
|
|
|
|
Virtual address of CCSR. On a 32-bit build, this is typically
|
|
|
|
the same value as CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_DEFAULT_IMMR must also be set to this value,
|
|
|
|
for cross-platform code that uses that macro instead.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS:
|
|
|
|
Physical address of CCSR. CCSR can be relocated to a new
|
|
|
|
physical address, if desired. In this case, this macro should
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
be set to that address. Otherwise, it should be set to the
|
2011-08-04 23:03:41 +00:00
|
|
|
same value as CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT. For example, CCSR
|
|
|
|
is typically relocated on 36-bit builds. It is recommended
|
|
|
|
that this macro be defined via the _HIGH and _LOW macros:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS ((CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_HIGH
|
|
|
|
* 1ull) << 32 | CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_LOW)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_HIGH:
|
2011-10-07 07:58:21 +00:00
|
|
|
Bits 33-36 of CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS. This value is typically
|
|
|
|
either 0 (32-bit build) or 0xF (36-bit build). This macro is
|
2011-08-04 23:03:41 +00:00
|
|
|
used in assembly code, so it must not contain typecasts or
|
|
|
|
integer size suffixes (e.g. "ULL").
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_LOW:
|
|
|
|
Lower 32-bits of CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS. This macro is
|
|
|
|
used in assembly code, so it must not contain typecasts or
|
|
|
|
integer size suffixes (e.g. "ULL").
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CCSR_DO_NOT_RELOCATE:
|
|
|
|
If this macro is defined, then CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS will be
|
|
|
|
forced to a value that ensures that CCSR is not relocated.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-10 22:06:23 +00:00
|
|
|
- Floppy Disk Support:
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FDC_DRIVE_NUMBER
|
2002-11-10 22:06:23 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
the default drive number (default value 0)
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_STRIDE
|
2002-11-10 22:06:23 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
defines the spacing between FDC chipset registers
|
2002-11-10 22:06:23 +00:00
|
|
|
(default value 1)
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_OFFSET
|
2002-11-10 22:06:23 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
defines the offset of register from address. It
|
|
|
|
depends on which part of the data bus is connected to
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
the FDC chipset. (default value 0)
|
2002-11-10 22:06:23 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
If CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_STRIDE CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_OFFSET and
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FDC_DRIVE_NUMBER are undefined, they take their
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
default value.
|
2002-11-10 22:06:23 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
if CONFIG_SYS_FDC_HW_INIT is defined, then the function
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
fdc_hw_init() is called at the beginning of the FDC
|
|
|
|
setup. fdc_hw_init() must be provided by the board
|
|
|
|
source code. It is used to make hardware dependant
|
|
|
|
initializations.
|
2002-11-10 22:06:23 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-04-11 20:45:32 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_IDE_AHB:
|
|
|
|
Most IDE controllers were designed to be connected with PCI
|
|
|
|
interface. Only few of them were designed for AHB interface.
|
|
|
|
When software is doing ATA command and data transfer to
|
|
|
|
IDE devices through IDE-AHB controller, some additional
|
|
|
|
registers accessing to these kind of IDE-AHB controller
|
|
|
|
is requierd.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_IMMR: Physical address of the Internal Memory.
|
2004-12-16 21:44:03 +00:00
|
|
|
DO NOT CHANGE unless you know exactly what you're
|
2004-12-10 11:40:40 +00:00
|
|
|
doing! (11-4) [MPC8xx/82xx systems only]
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-09-05 23:19:14 +00:00
|
|
|
Start address of memory area that can be used for
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
initial data and stack; please note that this must be
|
|
|
|
writable memory that is working WITHOUT special
|
|
|
|
initialization, i. e. you CANNOT use normal RAM which
|
|
|
|
will become available only after programming the
|
|
|
|
memory controller and running certain initialization
|
|
|
|
sequences.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
U-Boot uses the following memory types:
|
|
|
|
- MPC8xx and MPC8260: IMMR (internal memory of the CPU)
|
|
|
|
- MPC824X: data cache
|
|
|
|
- PPC4xx: data cache
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Offset of the initial data structure in the memory
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
area defined by CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR. Usually
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET is chosen such that the initial
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
data is located at the end of the available space
|
2010-10-26 11:32:32 +00:00
|
|
|
(sometimes written as (CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_SIZE -
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_INIT_DATA_SIZE), and the initial stack is just
|
|
|
|
below that area (growing from (CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR +
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET) downward.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note:
|
|
|
|
On the MPC824X (or other systems that use the data
|
|
|
|
cache for initial memory) the address chosen for
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR is basically arbitrary - it must
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
point to an otherwise UNUSED address space between
|
|
|
|
the top of RAM and the start of the PCI space.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SIUMCR: SIU Module Configuration (11-6)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SYPCR: System Protection Control (11-9)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_TBSCR: Time Base Status and Control (11-26)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_PISCR: Periodic Interrupt Status and Control (11-31)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_PLPRCR: PLL, Low-Power, and Reset Control Register (15-30)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SCCR: System Clock and reset Control Register (15-27)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_SDRAM:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
SDRAM timing
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MAMR_PTA:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
periodic timer for refresh
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_DER: Debug Event Register (37-47)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- FLASH_BASE0_PRELIM, FLASH_BASE1_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_REMAP_OR_AM,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_PRELIM_OR_AM, CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_FLASH, CONFIG_SYS_OR0_REMAP,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_OR0_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR0_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_OR1_REMAP, CONFIG_SYS_OR1_PRELIM,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_BR1_PRELIM:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Memory Controller Definitions: BR0/1 and OR0/1 (FLASH)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- SDRAM_BASE2_PRELIM, SDRAM_BASE3_PRELIM, SDRAM_MAX_SIZE,
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_SDRAM, CONFIG_SYS_OR2_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR2_PRELIM,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_OR3_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR3_PRELIM:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Memory Controller Definitions: BR2/3 and OR2/3 (SDRAM)
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MAMR_PTA, CONFIG_SYS_MPTPR_2BK_4K, CONFIG_SYS_MPTPR_1BK_4K, CONFIG_SYS_MPTPR_2BK_8K,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_MPTPR_1BK_8K, CONFIG_SYS_MAMR_8COL, CONFIG_SYS_MAMR_9COL:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Machine Mode Register and Memory Periodic Timer
|
|
|
|
Prescaler definitions (SDRAM timing)
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_UCODE_PATCH, CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DPMEM_OFFSET [0x1FC0]:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
enable I2C microcode relocation patch (MPC8xx);
|
|
|
|
define relocation offset in DPRAM [DSP2]
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SMC_UCODE_PATCH, CONFIG_SYS_SMC_DPMEM_OFFSET [0x1FC0]:
|
2008-01-11 00:12:07 +00:00
|
|
|
enable SMC microcode relocation patch (MPC8xx);
|
|
|
|
define relocation offset in DPRAM [SMC1]
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SPI_UCODE_PATCH, CONFIG_SYS_SPI_DPMEM_OFFSET [0x1FC0]:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
enable SPI microcode relocation patch (MPC8xx);
|
|
|
|
define relocation offset in DPRAM [SCC4]
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_USE_OSCCLK:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Use OSCM clock mode on MBX8xx board. Be careful,
|
|
|
|
wrong setting might damage your board. Read
|
|
|
|
doc/README.MBX before setting this variable!
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CPM_POST_WORD_ADDR: (MPC8xx, MPC8260 only)
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Offset of the bootmode word in DPRAM used by post
|
|
|
|
(Power On Self Tests). This definition overrides
|
|
|
|
#define'd default value in commproc.h resp.
|
|
|
|
cpm_8260.h.
|
2002-11-21 23:11:29 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_PCI_SLV_MEM_LOCAL, CONFIG_SYS_PCI_SLV_MEM_BUS, CONFIG_SYS_PICMR0_MASK_ATTRIB,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR0_LOCAL, CONFIG_SYS_PCIMSK0_MASK, CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR1_LOCAL,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_PCIMSK1_MASK, CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR_MEM_LOCAL, CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR_MEM_BUS,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_CPU_PCI_MEM_START, CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR_MEM_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_POCMR0_MASK_ATTRIB,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR_MEMIO_LOCAL, CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR_MEMIO_BUS, CPU_PCI_MEMIO_START,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR_MEMIO_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_POCMR1_MASK_ATTRIB, CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR_IO_LOCAL,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR_IO_BUS, CONFIG_SYS_CPU_PCI_IO_START, CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR_IO_SIZE,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_POCMR2_MASK_ATTRIB: (MPC826x only)
|
2010-04-15 14:07:28 +00:00
|
|
|
Overrides the default PCI memory map in arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8260/pci.c if set.
|
2003-05-22 22:52:13 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2009-02-09 07:18:34 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_PCI_DISABLE_PCIE:
|
|
|
|
Disable PCI-Express on systems where it is supported but not
|
|
|
|
required.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-08-29 14:16:32 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_PCI_ENUM_ONLY
|
|
|
|
Only scan through and get the devices on the busses.
|
|
|
|
Don't do any setup work, presumably because someone or
|
|
|
|
something has already done it, and we don't need to do it
|
|
|
|
a second time. Useful for platforms that are pre-booted
|
|
|
|
by coreboot or similar.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-05-30 07:06:12 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_PCI_INDIRECT_BRIDGE:
|
|
|
|
Enable support for indirect PCI bridges.
|
|
|
|
|
2010-12-30 18:09:53 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SRIO:
|
|
|
|
Chip has SRIO or not
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SRIO1:
|
|
|
|
Board has SRIO 1 port available
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SRIO2:
|
|
|
|
Board has SRIO 2 port available
|
|
|
|
|
2013-05-07 08:30:46 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SRIO_PCIE_BOOT_MASTER
|
|
|
|
Board can support master function for Boot from SRIO and PCIE
|
|
|
|
|
2010-12-30 18:09:53 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_VIRT:
|
|
|
|
Virtual Address of SRIO port 'n' memory region
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_PHYS:
|
|
|
|
Physical Address of SRIO port 'n' memory region
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_SIZE:
|
|
|
|
Size of SRIO port 'n' memory region
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-11 09:35:34 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BUSWIDTH_16BIT
|
|
|
|
Defined to tell the NAND controller that the NAND chip is using
|
|
|
|
a 16 bit bus.
|
|
|
|
Not all NAND drivers use this symbol.
|
2013-04-11 09:35:35 +00:00
|
|
|
Example of drivers that use it:
|
2013-04-11 09:35:34 +00:00
|
|
|
- drivers/mtd/nand/ndfc.c
|
2013-04-11 09:35:35 +00:00
|
|
|
- drivers/mtd/nand/mxc_nand.c
|
2011-05-19 19:08:36 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_NDFC_EBC0_CFG
|
|
|
|
Sets the EBC0_CFG register for the NDFC. If not defined
|
|
|
|
a default value will be used.
|
|
|
|
|
2006-09-07 20:50:54 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SPD_EEPROM
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
Get DDR timing information from an I2C EEPROM. Common
|
|
|
|
with pluggable memory modules such as SODIMMs
|
|
|
|
|
2006-09-07 20:50:54 +00:00
|
|
|
SPD_EEPROM_ADDRESS
|
|
|
|
I2C address of the SPD EEPROM
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SPD_BUS_NUM
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
If SPD EEPROM is on an I2C bus other than the first
|
|
|
|
one, specify here. Note that the value must resolve
|
|
|
|
to something your driver can deal with.
|
2006-09-07 20:50:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-06-07 01:42:16 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_DDR_RAW_TIMING
|
|
|
|
Get DDR timing information from other than SPD. Common with
|
|
|
|
soldered DDR chips onboard without SPD. DDR raw timing
|
|
|
|
parameters are extracted from datasheet and hard-coded into
|
|
|
|
header files or board specific files.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-09-16 20:21:35 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_FSL_DDR_INTERACTIVE
|
|
|
|
Enable interactive DDR debugging. See doc/README.fsl-ddr.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_83XX_DDR_USES_CS0
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
Only for 83xx systems. If specified, then DDR should
|
|
|
|
be configured using CS0 and CS1 instead of CS2 and CS3.
|
2006-11-01 00:44:42 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-04-18 10:13:26 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ETHER_ON_FEC[12]
|
|
|
|
Define to enable FEC[12] on a 8xx series processor.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_FEC[12]_PHY
|
|
|
|
Define to the hardcoded PHY address which corresponds
|
2004-04-18 17:39:38 +00:00
|
|
|
to the given FEC; i. e.
|
|
|
|
#define CONFIG_FEC1_PHY 4
|
2004-04-18 10:13:26 +00:00
|
|
|
means that the PHY with address 4 is connected to FEC1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When set to -1, means to probe for first available.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_FEC[12]_PHY_NORXERR
|
|
|
|
The PHY does not have a RXERR line (RMII only).
|
|
|
|
(so program the FEC to ignore it).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_RMII
|
|
|
|
Enable RMII mode for all FECs.
|
|
|
|
Note that this is a global option, we can't
|
|
|
|
have one FEC in standard MII mode and another in RMII mode.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-04-23 20:32:05 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_CRC32_VERIFY
|
|
|
|
Add a verify option to the crc32 command.
|
|
|
|
The syntax is:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> crc32 -v <address> <count> <crc32>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Where address/count indicate a memory area
|
|
|
|
and crc32 is the correct crc32 which the
|
|
|
|
area should have.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-07-11 17:40:54 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_LOOPW
|
|
|
|
Add the "loopw" memory command. This only takes effect if
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
the memory commands are activated globally (CONFIG_CMD_MEM).
|
2004-07-11 17:40:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-12-16 18:46:55 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_MX_CYCLIC
|
|
|
|
Add the "mdc" and "mwc" memory commands. These are cyclic
|
|
|
|
"md/mw" commands.
|
|
|
|
Examples:
|
|
|
|
|
2004-12-16 21:44:03 +00:00
|
|
|
=> mdc.b 10 4 500
|
2004-12-16 18:46:55 +00:00
|
|
|
This command will print 4 bytes (10,11,12,13) each 500 ms.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-12-16 21:44:03 +00:00
|
|
|
=> mwc.l 100 12345678 10
|
2004-12-16 18:46:55 +00:00
|
|
|
This command will write 12345678 to address 100 all 10 ms.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-12-16 21:44:03 +00:00
|
|
|
This only takes effect if the memory commands are activated
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
globally (CONFIG_CMD_MEM).
|
2004-12-16 18:46:55 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2005-04-04 12:44:11 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SKIP_LOWLEVEL_INIT
|
2011-10-19 20:41:11 +00:00
|
|
|
[ARM, NDS32, MIPS only] If this variable is defined, then certain
|
2010-11-27 22:30:56 +00:00
|
|
|
low level initializations (like setting up the memory
|
|
|
|
controller) are omitted and/or U-Boot does not
|
|
|
|
relocate itself into RAM.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Normally this variable MUST NOT be defined. The only
|
|
|
|
exception is when U-Boot is loaded (to RAM) by some
|
|
|
|
other boot loader or by a debugger which performs
|
|
|
|
these initializations itself.
|
2005-04-04 12:44:11 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-07-13 05:11:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SPL_BUILD
|
2009-06-13 18:50:00 +00:00
|
|
|
Modifies the behaviour of start.S when compiling a loader
|
|
|
|
that is executed before the actual U-Boot. E.g. when
|
|
|
|
compiling a NAND SPL.
|
2005-04-02 23:52:25 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2013-08-16 07:16:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_TPL_BUILD
|
|
|
|
Modifies the behaviour of start.S when compiling a loader
|
|
|
|
that is executed after the SPL and before the actual U-Boot.
|
|
|
|
It is loaded by the SPL.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-05-20 06:07:23 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MPC85XX_NO_RESETVEC
|
|
|
|
Only for 85xx systems. If this variable is specified, the section
|
|
|
|
.resetvec is not kept and the section .bootpg is placed in the
|
|
|
|
previous 4k of the .text section.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-02-24 17:33:14 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ARCH_MAP_SYSMEM
|
|
|
|
Generally U-Boot (and in particular the md command) uses
|
|
|
|
effective address. It is therefore not necessary to regard
|
|
|
|
U-Boot address as virtual addresses that need to be translated
|
|
|
|
to physical addresses. However, sandbox requires this, since
|
|
|
|
it maintains its own little RAM buffer which contains all
|
|
|
|
addressable memory. This option causes some memory accesses
|
|
|
|
to be mapped through map_sysmem() / unmap_sysmem().
|
|
|
|
|
2011-03-10 21:36:32 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_USE_ARCH_MEMCPY
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_USE_ARCH_MEMSET
|
|
|
|
If these options are used a optimized version of memcpy/memset will
|
|
|
|
be used if available. These functions may be faster under some
|
|
|
|
conditions but may increase the binary size.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-02-14 04:18:54 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_X86_RESET_VECTOR
|
|
|
|
If defined, the x86 reset vector code is included. This is not
|
|
|
|
needed when U-Boot is running from Coreboot.
|
2012-11-27 21:08:06 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2013-03-04 01:27:20 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MPUCLK
|
|
|
|
Defines the MPU clock speed (in MHz).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NOTE : currently only supported on AM335x platforms.
|
2012-11-29 16:23:41 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2013-11-04 13:05:00 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SPL_AM33XX_ENABLE_RTC32K_OSC:
|
|
|
|
Enables the RTC32K OSC on AM33xx based plattforms
|
|
|
|
|
2014-04-04 17:16:50 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_NAND_NO_SUBPAGE_WRITE
|
|
|
|
Option to disable subpage write in NAND driver
|
|
|
|
driver that uses this:
|
|
|
|
drivers/mtd/nand/davinci_nand.c
|
|
|
|
|
2011-11-22 15:21:25 +00:00
|
|
|
Freescale QE/FMAN Firmware Support:
|
|
|
|
-----------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Freescale QUICCEngine (QE) and Frame Manager (FMAN) both support the
|
|
|
|
loading of "firmware", which is encoded in the QE firmware binary format.
|
|
|
|
This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting, so macros
|
|
|
|
are used to identify the storage device (NOR flash, SPI, etc) and the address
|
|
|
|
within that device.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-03-21 08:21:44 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR
|
|
|
|
The address in the storage device where the FMAN microcode is located. The
|
|
|
|
meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_IN_xxx macro
|
|
|
|
is also specified.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_ADDR
|
|
|
|
The address in the storage device where the QE microcode is located. The
|
2011-11-22 15:21:25 +00:00
|
|
|
meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_IN_xxx macro
|
|
|
|
is also specified.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_LENGTH
|
|
|
|
The maximum possible size of the firmware. The firmware binary format
|
|
|
|
has a field that specifies the actual size of the firmware, but it
|
|
|
|
might not be possible to read any part of the firmware unless some
|
|
|
|
local storage is allocated to hold the entire firmware first.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_NOR
|
|
|
|
Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in NOR flash, mapped as
|
|
|
|
normal addressable memory via the LBC. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the
|
|
|
|
virtual address in NOR flash.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_NAND
|
|
|
|
Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in NAND flash.
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the offset within NAND flash.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_MMC
|
|
|
|
Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located on the primary SD/MMC
|
|
|
|
device. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the byte offset on that device.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_SPIFLASH
|
|
|
|
Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located on the primary SPI
|
|
|
|
device. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the byte offset on that device.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-03-08 00:33:18 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_REMOTE
|
|
|
|
Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in the remote (master)
|
|
|
|
memory space. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is a virtual address which
|
2012-08-09 05:10:01 +00:00
|
|
|
can be mapped from slave TLB->slave LAW->slave SRIO or PCIE outbound
|
|
|
|
window->master inbound window->master LAW->the ucode address in
|
|
|
|
master's memory space.
|
2011-11-22 15:21:25 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-06-23 22:15:55 +00:00
|
|
|
Freescale Layerscape Management Complex Firmware Support:
|
|
|
|
---------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
The Freescale Layerscape Management Complex (MC) supports the loading of
|
|
|
|
"firmware".
|
|
|
|
This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting, so macros
|
|
|
|
are used to identify the storage device (NOR flash, SPI, etc) and the address
|
|
|
|
within that device.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_FSL_MC_ENET
|
|
|
|
Enable the MC driver for Layerscape SoCs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_LS_MC_FW_ADDR
|
|
|
|
The address in the storage device where the firmware is located. The
|
|
|
|
meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_LS_MC_FW_IN_xxx macro
|
|
|
|
is also specified.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_LS_MC_FW_LENGTH
|
|
|
|
The maximum possible size of the firmware. The firmware binary format
|
|
|
|
has a field that specifies the actual size of the firmware, but it
|
|
|
|
might not be possible to read any part of the firmware unless some
|
|
|
|
local storage is allocated to hold the entire firmware first.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_LS_MC_FW_IN_NOR
|
|
|
|
Specifies that MC firmware is located in NOR flash, mapped as
|
|
|
|
normal addressable memory via the LBC. CONFIG_SYS_LS_MC_FW_ADDR is the
|
|
|
|
virtual address in NOR flash.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Building the Software:
|
|
|
|
======================
|
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
Building U-Boot has been tested in several native build environments
|
|
|
|
and in many different cross environments. Of course we cannot support
|
|
|
|
all possibly existing versions of cross development tools in all
|
|
|
|
(potentially obsolete) versions. In case of tool chain problems we
|
|
|
|
recommend to use the ELDK (see http://www.denx.de/wiki/DULG/ELDK)
|
|
|
|
which is extensively used to build and test U-Boot.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
If you are not using a native environment, it is assumed that you
|
|
|
|
have GNU cross compiling tools available in your path. In this case,
|
|
|
|
you must set the environment variable CROSS_COMPILE in your shell.
|
|
|
|
Note that no changes to the Makefile or any other source files are
|
|
|
|
necessary. For example using the ELDK on a 4xx CPU, please enter:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
$ CROSS_COMPILE=ppc_4xx-
|
|
|
|
$ export CROSS_COMPILE
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2009-03-13 23:54:51 +00:00
|
|
|
Note: If you wish to generate Windows versions of the utilities in
|
|
|
|
the tools directory you can use the MinGW toolchain
|
|
|
|
(http://www.mingw.org). Set your HOST tools to the MinGW
|
|
|
|
toolchain and execute 'make tools'. For example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$ make HOSTCC=i586-mingw32msvc-gcc HOSTSTRIP=i586-mingw32msvc-strip tools
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Binaries such as tools/mkimage.exe will be created which can
|
|
|
|
be executed on computers running Windows.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot is intended to be simple to build. After installing the
|
|
|
|
sources you must configure U-Boot for one specific board type. This
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
is done by typing:
|
|
|
|
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
make NAME_defconfig
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
where "NAME_defconfig" is the name of one of the existing configu-
|
2012-03-15 22:48:10 +00:00
|
|
|
rations; see boards.cfg for supported names.
|
2004-04-15 23:14:49 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Note: for some board special configuration names may exist; check if
|
|
|
|
additional information is available from the board vendor; for
|
|
|
|
instance, the TQM823L systems are available without (standard)
|
|
|
|
or with LCD support. You can select such additional "features"
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
when choosing the configuration, i. e.
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
make TQM823L_defconfig
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- will configure for a plain TQM823L, i. e. no LCD support
|
|
|
|
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
make TQM823L_LCD_defconfig
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- will configure for a TQM823L with U-Boot console on LCD
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
etc.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Finally, type "make all", and you should get some working U-Boot
|
|
|
|
images ready for download to / installation on your system:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- "u-boot.bin" is a raw binary image
|
|
|
|
- "u-boot" is an image in ELF binary format
|
|
|
|
- "u-boot.srec" is in Motorola S-Record format
|
|
|
|
|
2006-09-07 15:25:40 +00:00
|
|
|
By default the build is performed locally and the objects are saved
|
|
|
|
in the source directory. One of the two methods can be used to change
|
|
|
|
this behavior and build U-Boot to some external directory:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Add O= to the make command line invocations:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
make O=/tmp/build distclean
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
make O=/tmp/build NAME_defconfig
|
2006-09-07 15:25:40 +00:00
|
|
|
make O=/tmp/build all
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2. Set environment variable BUILD_DIR to point to the desired location:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
export BUILD_DIR=/tmp/build
|
|
|
|
make distclean
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
make NAME_defconfig
|
2006-09-07 15:25:40 +00:00
|
|
|
make all
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that the command line "O=" setting overrides the BUILD_DIR environment
|
|
|
|
variable.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please be aware that the Makefiles assume you are using GNU make, so
|
|
|
|
for instance on NetBSD you might need to use "gmake" instead of
|
|
|
|
native "make".
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the system board that you have is not listed, then you will need
|
|
|
|
to port U-Boot to your hardware platform. To do this, follow these
|
|
|
|
steps:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Add a new configuration option for your board to the toplevel
|
2012-03-15 22:48:10 +00:00
|
|
|
"boards.cfg" file, using the existing entries as examples.
|
|
|
|
Follow the instructions there to keep the boards in order.
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
2. Create a new directory to hold your board specific code. Add any
|
|
|
|
files you need. In your board directory, you will need at least
|
|
|
|
the "Makefile", a "<board>.c", "flash.c" and "u-boot.lds".
|
|
|
|
3. Create a new configuration file "include/configs/<board>.h" for
|
|
|
|
your board
|
|
|
|
3. If you're porting U-Boot to a new CPU, then also create a new
|
|
|
|
directory to hold your CPU specific code. Add any files you need.
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
4. Run "make <board>_defconfig" with your new name.
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
5. Type "make", and you should get a working "u-boot.srec" file
|
|
|
|
to be installed on your target system.
|
|
|
|
6. Debug and solve any problems that might arise.
|
|
|
|
[Of course, this last step is much harder than it sounds.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Testing of U-Boot Modifications, Ports to New Hardware, etc.:
|
|
|
|
==============================================================
|
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
If you have modified U-Boot sources (for instance added a new board
|
|
|
|
or support for new devices, a new CPU, etc.) you are expected to
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
provide feedback to the other developers. The feedback normally takes
|
|
|
|
the form of a "patch", i. e. a context diff against a certain (latest
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
official or latest in the git repository) version of U-Boot sources.
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
But before you submit such a patch, please verify that your modifi-
|
|
|
|
cation did not break existing code. At least make sure that *ALL* of
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
the supported boards compile WITHOUT ANY compiler warnings. To do so,
|
|
|
|
just run the "MAKEALL" script, which will configure and build U-Boot
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
for ALL supported system. Be warned, this will take a while. You can
|
|
|
|
select which (cross) compiler to use by passing a `CROSS_COMPILE'
|
|
|
|
environment variable to the script, i. e. to use the ELDK cross tools
|
|
|
|
you can type
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CROSS_COMPILE=ppc_8xx- MAKEALL
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
or to build on a native PowerPC system you can type
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CROSS_COMPILE=' ' MAKEALL
|
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
When using the MAKEALL script, the default behaviour is to build
|
|
|
|
U-Boot in the source directory. This location can be changed by
|
|
|
|
setting the BUILD_DIR environment variable. Also, for each target
|
|
|
|
built, the MAKEALL script saves two log files (<target>.ERR and
|
|
|
|
<target>.MAKEALL) in the <source dir>/LOG directory. This default
|
|
|
|
location can be changed by setting the MAKEALL_LOGDIR environment
|
|
|
|
variable. For example:
|
2006-09-07 15:25:40 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
export BUILD_DIR=/tmp/build
|
|
|
|
export MAKEALL_LOGDIR=/tmp/log
|
|
|
|
CROSS_COMPILE=ppc_8xx- MAKEALL
|
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
With the above settings build objects are saved in the /tmp/build,
|
|
|
|
log files are saved in the /tmp/log and the source tree remains clean
|
|
|
|
during the whole build process.
|
2006-09-07 15:25:40 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
See also "U-Boot Porting Guide" below.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Monitor Commands - Overview:
|
|
|
|
============================
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
go - start application at address 'addr'
|
|
|
|
run - run commands in an environment variable
|
|
|
|
bootm - boot application image from memory
|
|
|
|
bootp - boot image via network using BootP/TFTP protocol
|
2012-03-14 21:52:45 +00:00
|
|
|
bootz - boot zImage from memory
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
tftpboot- boot image via network using TFTP protocol
|
|
|
|
and env variables "ipaddr" and "serverip"
|
|
|
|
(and eventually "gatewayip")
|
2011-10-24 18:00:07 +00:00
|
|
|
tftpput - upload a file via network using TFTP protocol
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
rarpboot- boot image via network using RARP/TFTP protocol
|
|
|
|
diskboot- boot from IDE devicebootd - boot default, i.e., run 'bootcmd'
|
|
|
|
loads - load S-Record file over serial line
|
|
|
|
loadb - load binary file over serial line (kermit mode)
|
|
|
|
md - memory display
|
|
|
|
mm - memory modify (auto-incrementing)
|
|
|
|
nm - memory modify (constant address)
|
|
|
|
mw - memory write (fill)
|
|
|
|
cp - memory copy
|
|
|
|
cmp - memory compare
|
|
|
|
crc32 - checksum calculation
|
2009-04-19 03:34:03 +00:00
|
|
|
i2c - I2C sub-system
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
sspi - SPI utility commands
|
|
|
|
base - print or set address offset
|
|
|
|
printenv- print environment variables
|
|
|
|
setenv - set environment variables
|
|
|
|
saveenv - save environment variables to persistent storage
|
|
|
|
protect - enable or disable FLASH write protection
|
|
|
|
erase - erase FLASH memory
|
|
|
|
flinfo - print FLASH memory information
|
2012-08-03 05:57:21 +00:00
|
|
|
nand - NAND memory operations (see doc/README.nand)
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
bdinfo - print Board Info structure
|
|
|
|
iminfo - print header information for application image
|
|
|
|
coninfo - print console devices and informations
|
|
|
|
ide - IDE sub-system
|
|
|
|
loop - infinite loop on address range
|
2004-07-11 17:40:54 +00:00
|
|
|
loopw - infinite write loop on address range
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
mtest - simple RAM test
|
|
|
|
icache - enable or disable instruction cache
|
|
|
|
dcache - enable or disable data cache
|
|
|
|
reset - Perform RESET of the CPU
|
|
|
|
echo - echo args to console
|
|
|
|
version - print monitor version
|
|
|
|
help - print online help
|
|
|
|
? - alias for 'help'
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Monitor Commands - Detailed Description:
|
|
|
|
========================================
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
TODO.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For now: just type "help <command>".
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Environment Variables:
|
|
|
|
======================
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
U-Boot supports user configuration using Environment Variables which
|
|
|
|
can be made persistent by saving to Flash memory.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Environment Variables are set using "setenv", printed using
|
|
|
|
"printenv", and saved to Flash using "saveenv". Using "setenv"
|
|
|
|
without a value can be used to delete a variable from the
|
|
|
|
environment. As long as you don't save the environment you are
|
|
|
|
working with an in-memory copy. In case the Flash area containing the
|
|
|
|
environment is erased by accident, a default environment is provided.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2010-01-17 22:55:53 +00:00
|
|
|
Some configuration options can be set using Environment Variables.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
List of environment variables (most likely not complete):
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
baudrate - see CONFIG_BAUDRATE
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
bootdelay - see CONFIG_BOOTDELAY
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
bootcmd - see CONFIG_BOOTCOMMAND
|
2003-04-12 23:38:12 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
bootargs - Boot arguments when booting an RTOS image
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
bootfile - Name of the image to load with TFTP
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-04-14 13:44:16 +00:00
|
|
|
bootm_low - Memory range available for image processing in the bootm
|
|
|
|
command can be restricted. This variable is given as
|
|
|
|
a hexadecimal number and defines lowest address allowed
|
|
|
|
for use by the bootm command. See also "bootm_size"
|
|
|
|
environment variable. Address defined by "bootm_low" is
|
|
|
|
also the base of the initial memory mapping for the Linux
|
2011-03-28 09:58:43 +00:00
|
|
|
kernel -- see the description of CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ and
|
|
|
|
bootm_mapsize.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
bootm_mapsize - Size of the initial memory mapping for the Linux kernel.
|
2011-03-28 09:58:43 +00:00
|
|
|
This variable is given as a hexadecimal number and it
|
|
|
|
defines the size of the memory region starting at base
|
|
|
|
address bootm_low that is accessible by the Linux kernel
|
|
|
|
during early boot. If unset, CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ is used
|
|
|
|
as the default value if it is defined, and bootm_size is
|
|
|
|
used otherwise.
|
2008-04-14 13:44:16 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
bootm_size - Memory range available for image processing in the bootm
|
|
|
|
command can be restricted. This variable is given as
|
|
|
|
a hexadecimal number and defines the size of the region
|
|
|
|
allowed for use by the bootm command. See also "bootm_low"
|
|
|
|
environment variable.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-01 13:26:31 +00:00
|
|
|
updatefile - Location of the software update file on a TFTP server, used
|
|
|
|
by the automatic software update feature. Please refer to
|
|
|
|
documentation in doc/README.update for more details.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
autoload - if set to "no" (any string beginning with 'n'),
|
|
|
|
"bootp" will just load perform a lookup of the
|
|
|
|
configuration from the BOOTP server, but not try to
|
|
|
|
load any image using TFTP
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
autostart - if set to "yes", an image loaded using the "bootp",
|
|
|
|
"rarpboot", "tftpboot" or "diskboot" commands will
|
|
|
|
be automatically started (by internally calling
|
|
|
|
"bootm")
|
2003-05-23 23:18:21 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
If set to "no", a standalone image passed to the
|
|
|
|
"bootm" command will be copied to the load address
|
|
|
|
(and eventually uncompressed), but NOT be started.
|
|
|
|
This can be used to load and uncompress arbitrary
|
|
|
|
data.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-07-09 20:40:19 +00:00
|
|
|
fdt_high - if set this restricts the maximum address that the
|
|
|
|
flattened device tree will be copied into upon boot.
|
2012-01-09 21:54:08 +00:00
|
|
|
For example, if you have a system with 1 GB memory
|
|
|
|
at physical address 0x10000000, while Linux kernel
|
|
|
|
only recognizes the first 704 MB as low memory, you
|
|
|
|
may need to set fdt_high as 0x3C000000 to have the
|
|
|
|
device tree blob be copied to the maximum address
|
|
|
|
of the 704 MB low memory, so that Linux kernel can
|
|
|
|
access it during the boot procedure.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-07-09 20:40:19 +00:00
|
|
|
If this is set to the special value 0xFFFFFFFF then
|
|
|
|
the fdt will not be copied at all on boot. For this
|
|
|
|
to work it must reside in writable memory, have
|
|
|
|
sufficient padding on the end of it for u-boot to
|
|
|
|
add the information it needs into it, and the memory
|
|
|
|
must be accessible by the kernel.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-10-24 19:15:34 +00:00
|
|
|
fdtcontroladdr- if set this is the address of the control flattened
|
|
|
|
device tree used by U-Boot when CONFIG_OF_CONTROL is
|
|
|
|
defined.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-06-06 21:51:03 +00:00
|
|
|
i2cfast - (PPC405GP|PPC405EP only)
|
|
|
|
if set to 'y' configures Linux I2C driver for fast
|
|
|
|
mode (400kHZ). This environment variable is used in
|
|
|
|
initialization code. So, for changes to be effective
|
|
|
|
it must be saved and board must be reset.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
initrd_high - restrict positioning of initrd images:
|
|
|
|
If this variable is not set, initrd images will be
|
|
|
|
copied to the highest possible address in RAM; this
|
|
|
|
is usually what you want since it allows for
|
|
|
|
maximum initrd size. If for some reason you want to
|
|
|
|
make sure that the initrd image is loaded below the
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ limit, you can set this environment
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
variable to a value of "no" or "off" or "0".
|
|
|
|
Alternatively, you can set it to a maximum upper
|
|
|
|
address to use (U-Boot will still check that it
|
|
|
|
does not overwrite the U-Boot stack and data).
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
For instance, when you have a system with 16 MB
|
|
|
|
RAM, and want to reserve 4 MB from use by Linux,
|
|
|
|
you can do this by adding "mem=12M" to the value of
|
|
|
|
the "bootargs" variable. However, now you must make
|
|
|
|
sure that the initrd image is placed in the first
|
|
|
|
12 MB as well - this can be done with
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
setenv initrd_high 00c00000
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
If you set initrd_high to 0xFFFFFFFF, this is an
|
|
|
|
indication to U-Boot that all addresses are legal
|
|
|
|
for the Linux kernel, including addresses in flash
|
|
|
|
memory. In this case U-Boot will NOT COPY the
|
|
|
|
ramdisk at all. This may be useful to reduce the
|
|
|
|
boot time on your system, but requires that this
|
|
|
|
feature is supported by your Linux kernel.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
ipaddr - IP address; needed for tftpboot command
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
loadaddr - Default load address for commands like "bootp",
|
|
|
|
"rarpboot", "tftpboot", "loadb" or "diskboot"
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
loads_echo - see CONFIG_LOADS_ECHO
|
2004-04-15 21:48:45 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
serverip - TFTP server IP address; needed for tftpboot command
|
2004-04-15 21:48:45 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
bootretry - see CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME
|
2004-04-15 21:48:45 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
bootdelaykey - see CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_DELAY_STR
|
2004-04-15 21:48:45 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
bootstopkey - see CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_STOP_STR
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-10-02 10:01:27 +00:00
|
|
|
ethprime - controls which interface is used first.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-10-02 10:01:27 +00:00
|
|
|
ethact - controls which interface is currently active.
|
|
|
|
For example you can do the following
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2010-07-20 15:45:02 +00:00
|
|
|
=> setenv ethact FEC
|
|
|
|
=> ping 192.168.0.1 # traffic sent on FEC
|
|
|
|
=> setenv ethact SCC
|
|
|
|
=> ping 10.0.0.1 # traffic sent on SCC
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-01-17 06:45:05 +00:00
|
|
|
ethrotate - When set to "no" U-Boot does not go through all
|
|
|
|
available network interfaces.
|
|
|
|
It just stays at the currently selected interface.
|
|
|
|
|
2010-01-17 22:55:53 +00:00
|
|
|
netretry - When set to "no" each network operation will
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
either succeed or fail without retrying.
|
|
|
|
When set to "once" the network operation will
|
|
|
|
fail when all the available network interfaces
|
|
|
|
are tried once without success.
|
|
|
|
Useful on scripts which control the retry operation
|
|
|
|
themselves.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2009-01-31 08:53:39 +00:00
|
|
|
npe_ucode - set load address for the NPE microcode
|
2008-01-07 07:41:34 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2013-07-17 03:10:00 +00:00
|
|
|
silent_linux - If set then linux will be told to boot silently, by
|
|
|
|
changing the console to be empty. If "yes" it will be
|
|
|
|
made silent. If "no" it will not be made silent. If
|
|
|
|
unset, then it will be made silent if the U-Boot console
|
|
|
|
is silent.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-09-24 21:25:46 +00:00
|
|
|
tftpsrcport - If this is set, the value is used for TFTP's
|
2005-09-24 20:37:32 +00:00
|
|
|
UDP source port.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-09-24 21:25:46 +00:00
|
|
|
tftpdstport - If this is set, the value is used for TFTP's UDP
|
|
|
|
destination port instead of the Well Know Port 69.
|
|
|
|
|
2010-01-17 22:55:53 +00:00
|
|
|
tftpblocksize - Block size to use for TFTP transfers; if not set,
|
|
|
|
we use the TFTP server's default block size
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
tftptimeout - Retransmission timeout for TFTP packets (in milli-
|
|
|
|
seconds, minimum value is 1000 = 1 second). Defines
|
|
|
|
when a packet is considered to be lost so it has to
|
|
|
|
be retransmitted. The default is 5000 = 5 seconds.
|
|
|
|
Lowering this value may make downloads succeed
|
|
|
|
faster in networks with high packet loss rates or
|
|
|
|
with unreliable TFTP servers.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
vlan - When set to a value < 4095 the traffic over
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
Ethernet is encapsulated/received over 802.1q
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
VLAN tagged frames.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-08-31 05:37:28 +00:00
|
|
|
The following image location variables contain the location of images
|
|
|
|
used in booting. The "Image" column gives the role of the image and is
|
|
|
|
not an environment variable name. The other columns are environment
|
|
|
|
variable names. "File Name" gives the name of the file on a TFTP
|
|
|
|
server, "RAM Address" gives the location in RAM the image will be
|
|
|
|
loaded to, and "Flash Location" gives the image's address in NOR
|
|
|
|
flash or offset in NAND flash.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*Note* - these variables don't have to be defined for all boards, some
|
|
|
|
boards currenlty use other variables for these purposes, and some
|
|
|
|
boards use these variables for other purposes.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
Image File Name RAM Address Flash Location
|
|
|
|
----- --------- ----------- --------------
|
|
|
|
u-boot u-boot u-boot_addr_r u-boot_addr
|
|
|
|
Linux kernel bootfile kernel_addr_r kernel_addr
|
|
|
|
device tree blob fdtfile fdt_addr_r fdt_addr
|
|
|
|
ramdisk ramdiskfile ramdisk_addr_r ramdisk_addr
|
2011-08-31 05:37:28 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
The following environment variables may be used and automatically
|
|
|
|
updated by the network boot commands ("bootp" and "rarpboot"),
|
|
|
|
depending the information provided by your boot server:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
bootfile - see above
|
|
|
|
dnsip - IP address of your Domain Name Server
|
|
|
|
dnsip2 - IP address of your secondary Domain Name Server
|
|
|
|
gatewayip - IP address of the Gateway (Router) to use
|
|
|
|
hostname - Target hostname
|
|
|
|
ipaddr - see above
|
|
|
|
netmask - Subnet Mask
|
|
|
|
rootpath - Pathname of the root filesystem on the NFS server
|
|
|
|
serverip - see above
|
2003-04-04 15:53:41 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
There are two special Environment Variables:
|
2003-04-04 15:53:41 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
serial# - contains hardware identification information such
|
|
|
|
as type string and/or serial number
|
|
|
|
ethaddr - Ethernet address
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
These variables can be set only once (usually during manufacturing of
|
|
|
|
the board). U-Boot refuses to delete or overwrite these variables
|
|
|
|
once they have been set once.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-05-28 08:06:31 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Further special Environment Variables:
|
2003-05-28 08:06:31 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
ver - Contains the U-Boot version string as printed
|
|
|
|
with the "version" command. This variable is
|
|
|
|
readonly (see CONFIG_VERSION_VARIABLE).
|
2003-05-28 08:06:31 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Please note that changes to some configuration parameters may take
|
|
|
|
only effect after the next boot (yes, that's just like Windoze :-).
|
2003-05-28 08:06:31 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2012-12-12 04:16:24 +00:00
|
|
|
Callback functions for environment variables:
|
|
|
|
---------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For some environment variables, the behavior of u-boot needs to change
|
|
|
|
when their values are changed. This functionailty allows functions to
|
|
|
|
be associated with arbitrary variables. On creation, overwrite, or
|
|
|
|
deletion, the callback will provide the opportunity for some side
|
|
|
|
effect to happen or for the change to be rejected.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The callbacks are named and associated with a function using the
|
|
|
|
U_BOOT_ENV_CALLBACK macro in your board or driver code.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
These callbacks are associated with variables in one of two ways. The
|
|
|
|
static list can be added to by defining CONFIG_ENV_CALLBACK_LIST_STATIC
|
|
|
|
in the board configuration to a string that defines a list of
|
|
|
|
associations. The list must be in the following format:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
entry = variable_name[:callback_name]
|
|
|
|
list = entry[,list]
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the callback name is not specified, then the callback is deleted.
|
|
|
|
Spaces are also allowed anywhere in the list.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Callbacks can also be associated by defining the ".callbacks" variable
|
|
|
|
with the same list format above. Any association in ".callbacks" will
|
|
|
|
override any association in the static list. You can define
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_ENV_CALLBACK_LIST_DEFAULT to a list (string) to define the
|
|
|
|
".callbacks" envirnoment variable in the default or embedded environment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Command Line Parsing:
|
|
|
|
=====================
|
2003-05-28 08:06:31 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
There are two different command line parsers available with U-Boot:
|
|
|
|
the old "simple" one, and the much more powerful "hush" shell:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Old, simple command line parser:
|
|
|
|
--------------------------------
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- supports environment variables (through setenv / saveenv commands)
|
|
|
|
- several commands on one line, separated by ';'
|
2005-11-20 20:40:11 +00:00
|
|
|
- variable substitution using "... ${name} ..." syntax
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- special characters ('$', ';') can be escaped by prefixing with '\',
|
|
|
|
for example:
|
2005-11-20 20:40:11 +00:00
|
|
|
setenv bootcmd bootm \${address}
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- You can also escape text by enclosing in single apostrophes, for example:
|
|
|
|
setenv addip 'setenv bootargs $bootargs ip=$ipaddr:$serverip:$gatewayip:$netmask:$hostname::off'
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Hush shell:
|
|
|
|
-----------
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- similar to Bourne shell, with control structures like
|
|
|
|
if...then...else...fi, for...do...done; while...do...done,
|
|
|
|
until...do...done, ...
|
|
|
|
- supports environment ("global") variables (through setenv / saveenv
|
|
|
|
commands) and local shell variables (through standard shell syntax
|
|
|
|
"name=value"); only environment variables can be used with "run"
|
|
|
|
command
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
General rules:
|
|
|
|
--------------
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
(1) If a command line (or an environment variable executed by a "run"
|
|
|
|
command) contains several commands separated by semicolon, and
|
|
|
|
one of these commands fails, then the remaining commands will be
|
|
|
|
executed anyway.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
(2) If you execute several variables with one call to run (i. e.
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
calling run with a list of variables as arguments), any failing
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
command will cause "run" to terminate, i. e. the remaining
|
|
|
|
variables are not executed.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Note for Redundant Ethernet Interfaces:
|
|
|
|
=======================================
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
Some boards come with redundant Ethernet interfaces; U-Boot supports
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
such configurations and is capable of automatic selection of a
|
|
|
|
"working" interface when needed. MAC assignment works as follows:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Network interfaces are numbered eth0, eth1, eth2, ... Corresponding
|
|
|
|
MAC addresses can be stored in the environment as "ethaddr" (=>eth0),
|
|
|
|
"eth1addr" (=>eth1), "eth2addr", ...
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
If the network interface stores some valid MAC address (for instance
|
|
|
|
in SROM), this is used as default address if there is NO correspon-
|
|
|
|
ding setting in the environment; if the corresponding environment
|
|
|
|
variable is set, this overrides the settings in the card; that means:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
o If the SROM has a valid MAC address, and there is no address in the
|
|
|
|
environment, the SROM's address is used.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
o If there is no valid address in the SROM, and a definition in the
|
|
|
|
environment exists, then the value from the environment variable is
|
|
|
|
used.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
o If both the SROM and the environment contain a MAC address, and
|
|
|
|
both addresses are the same, this MAC address is used.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
o If both the SROM and the environment contain a MAC address, and the
|
|
|
|
addresses differ, the value from the environment is used and a
|
|
|
|
warning is printed.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
o If neither SROM nor the environment contain a MAC address, an error
|
|
|
|
is raised.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2010-04-26 18:11:46 +00:00
|
|
|
If Ethernet drivers implement the 'write_hwaddr' function, valid MAC addresses
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
will be programmed into hardware as part of the initialization process. This
|
2010-04-26 18:11:46 +00:00
|
|
|
may be skipped by setting the appropriate 'ethmacskip' environment variable.
|
|
|
|
The naming convention is as follows:
|
|
|
|
"ethmacskip" (=>eth0), "eth1macskip" (=>eth1) etc.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Image Formats:
|
|
|
|
==============
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-03-12 11:13:13 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot is capable of booting (and performing other auxiliary operations on)
|
|
|
|
images in two formats:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
New uImage format (FIT)
|
|
|
|
-----------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Flexible and powerful format based on Flattened Image Tree -- FIT (similar
|
|
|
|
to Flattened Device Tree). It allows the use of images with multiple
|
|
|
|
components (several kernels, ramdisks, etc.), with contents protected by
|
|
|
|
SHA1, MD5 or CRC32. More details are found in the doc/uImage.FIT directory.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Old uImage format
|
|
|
|
-----------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Old image format is based on binary files which can be basically anything,
|
|
|
|
preceded by a special header; see the definitions in include/image.h for
|
|
|
|
details; basically, the header defines the following image properties:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* Target Operating System (Provisions for OpenBSD, NetBSD, FreeBSD,
|
|
|
|
4.4BSD, Linux, SVR4, Esix, Solaris, Irix, SCO, Dell, NCR, VxWorks,
|
2008-09-08 19:56:49 +00:00
|
|
|
LynxOS, pSOS, QNX, RTEMS, INTEGRITY;
|
|
|
|
Currently supported: Linux, NetBSD, VxWorks, QNX, RTEMS, LynxOS,
|
|
|
|
INTEGRITY).
|
2006-10-24 12:21:16 +00:00
|
|
|
* Target CPU Architecture (Provisions for Alpha, ARM, AVR32, Intel x86,
|
2011-10-19 20:41:11 +00:00
|
|
|
IA64, MIPS, NDS32, Nios II, PowerPC, IBM S390, SuperH, Sparc, Sparc 64 Bit;
|
|
|
|
Currently supported: ARM, AVR32, Intel x86, MIPS, NDS32, Nios II, PowerPC).
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* Compression Type (uncompressed, gzip, bzip2)
|
|
|
|
* Load Address
|
|
|
|
* Entry Point
|
|
|
|
* Image Name
|
|
|
|
* Image Timestamp
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
The header is marked by a special Magic Number, and both the header
|
|
|
|
and the data portions of the image are secured against corruption by
|
|
|
|
CRC32 checksums.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Linux Support:
|
|
|
|
==============
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Although U-Boot should support any OS or standalone application
|
|
|
|
easily, the main focus has always been on Linux during the design of
|
|
|
|
U-Boot.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot includes many features that so far have been part of some
|
|
|
|
special "boot loader" code within the Linux kernel. Also, any
|
|
|
|
"initrd" images to be used are no longer part of one big Linux image;
|
|
|
|
instead, kernel and "initrd" are separate images. This implementation
|
|
|
|
serves several purposes:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- the same features can be used for other OS or standalone
|
|
|
|
applications (for instance: using compressed images to reduce the
|
|
|
|
Flash memory footprint)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- it becomes much easier to port new Linux kernel versions because
|
|
|
|
lots of low-level, hardware dependent stuff are done by U-Boot
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- the same Linux kernel image can now be used with different "initrd"
|
|
|
|
images; of course this also means that different kernel images can
|
|
|
|
be run with the same "initrd". This makes testing easier (you don't
|
|
|
|
have to build a new "zImage.initrd" Linux image when you just
|
|
|
|
change a file in your "initrd"). Also, a field-upgrade of the
|
|
|
|
software is easier now.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Linux HOWTO:
|
|
|
|
============
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Porting Linux to U-Boot based systems:
|
|
|
|
---------------------------------------
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot cannot save you from doing all the necessary modifications to
|
|
|
|
configure the Linux device drivers for use with your target hardware
|
|
|
|
(no, we don't intend to provide a full virtual machine interface to
|
|
|
|
Linux :-).
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2010-04-15 14:07:28 +00:00
|
|
|
But now you can ignore ALL boot loader code (in arch/powerpc/mbxboot).
|
2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Just make sure your machine specific header file (for instance
|
|
|
|
include/asm-ppc/tqm8xx.h) includes the same definition of the Board
|
2008-09-07 18:18:27 +00:00
|
|
|
Information structure as we define in include/asm-<arch>/u-boot.h,
|
|
|
|
and make sure that your definition of IMAP_ADDR uses the same value
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
as your U-Boot configuration in CONFIG_SYS_IMMR.
|
2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-06-12 05:29:46 +00:00
|
|
|
Note that U-Boot now has a driver model, a unified model for drivers.
|
|
|
|
If you are adding a new driver, plumb it into driver model. If there
|
|
|
|
is no uclass available, you are encouraged to create one. See
|
|
|
|
doc/driver-model.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Configuring the Linux kernel:
|
|
|
|
-----------------------------
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
No specific requirements for U-Boot. Make sure you have some root
|
|
|
|
device (initial ramdisk, NFS) for your target system.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Building a Linux Image:
|
|
|
|
-----------------------
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
With U-Boot, "normal" build targets like "zImage" or "bzImage" are
|
|
|
|
not used. If you use recent kernel source, a new build target
|
|
|
|
"uImage" will exist which automatically builds an image usable by
|
|
|
|
U-Boot. Most older kernels also have support for a "pImage" target,
|
|
|
|
which was introduced for our predecessor project PPCBoot and uses a
|
|
|
|
100% compatible format.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
make TQM850L_defconfig
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
make oldconfig
|
|
|
|
make dep
|
|
|
|
make uImage
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The "uImage" build target uses a special tool (in 'tools/mkimage') to
|
|
|
|
encapsulate a compressed Linux kernel image with header information,
|
|
|
|
CRC32 checksum etc. for use with U-Boot. This is what we are doing:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* build a standard "vmlinux" kernel image (in ELF binary format):
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* convert the kernel into a raw binary image:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
${CROSS_COMPILE}-objcopy -O binary \
|
|
|
|
-R .note -R .comment \
|
|
|
|
-S vmlinux linux.bin
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* compress the binary image:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
gzip -9 linux.bin
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* package compressed binary image for U-Boot:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
mkimage -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C gzip \
|
|
|
|
-a 0 -e 0 -n "Linux Kernel Image" \
|
|
|
|
-d linux.bin.gz uImage
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
The "mkimage" tool can also be used to create ramdisk images for use
|
|
|
|
with U-Boot, either separated from the Linux kernel image, or
|
|
|
|
combined into one file. "mkimage" encapsulates the images with a 64
|
|
|
|
byte header containing information about target architecture,
|
|
|
|
operating system, image type, compression method, entry points, time
|
|
|
|
stamp, CRC32 checksums, etc.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
"mkimage" can be called in two ways: to verify existing images and
|
|
|
|
print the header information, or to build new images.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the first form (with "-l" option) mkimage lists the information
|
|
|
|
contained in the header of an existing U-Boot image; this includes
|
|
|
|
checksum verification:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
tools/mkimage -l image
|
|
|
|
-l ==> list image header information
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The second form (with "-d" option) is used to build a U-Boot image
|
|
|
|
from a "data file" which is used as image payload:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
tools/mkimage -A arch -O os -T type -C comp -a addr -e ep \
|
|
|
|
-n name -d data_file image
|
|
|
|
-A ==> set architecture to 'arch'
|
|
|
|
-O ==> set operating system to 'os'
|
|
|
|
-T ==> set image type to 'type'
|
|
|
|
-C ==> set compression type 'comp'
|
|
|
|
-a ==> set load address to 'addr' (hex)
|
|
|
|
-e ==> set entry point to 'ep' (hex)
|
|
|
|
-n ==> set image name to 'name'
|
|
|
|
-d ==> use image data from 'datafile'
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-29 16:53:29 +00:00
|
|
|
Right now, all Linux kernels for PowerPC systems use the same load
|
|
|
|
address (0x00000000), but the entry point address depends on the
|
|
|
|
kernel version:
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- 2.2.x kernels have the entry point at 0x0000000C,
|
|
|
|
- 2.3.x and later kernels have the entry point at 0x00000000.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
So a typical call to build a U-Boot image would read:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-> tools/mkimage -n '2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L' \
|
|
|
|
> -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C gzip -a 0 -e 0 \
|
2010-04-15 14:07:28 +00:00
|
|
|
> -d /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux.gz \
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
> examples/uImage.TQM850L
|
|
|
|
Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L
|
|
|
|
Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327.86 kB = 0.32 MB
|
|
|
|
Load Address: 0x00000000
|
|
|
|
Entry Point: 0x00000000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To verify the contents of the image (or check for corruption):
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-> tools/mkimage -l examples/uImage.TQM850L
|
|
|
|
Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L
|
|
|
|
Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327.86 kB = 0.32 MB
|
|
|
|
Load Address: 0x00000000
|
|
|
|
Entry Point: 0x00000000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NOTE: for embedded systems where boot time is critical you can trade
|
|
|
|
speed for memory and install an UNCOMPRESSED image instead: this
|
|
|
|
needs more space in Flash, but boots much faster since it does not
|
|
|
|
need to be uncompressed:
|
|
|
|
|
2010-04-15 14:07:28 +00:00
|
|
|
-> gunzip /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux.gz
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
-> tools/mkimage -n '2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L' \
|
|
|
|
> -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C none -a 0 -e 0 \
|
2010-04-15 14:07:28 +00:00
|
|
|
> -d /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux \
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
> examples/uImage.TQM850L-uncompressed
|
|
|
|
Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L
|
|
|
|
Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (uncompressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 792160 Bytes = 773.59 kB = 0.76 MB
|
|
|
|
Load Address: 0x00000000
|
|
|
|
Entry Point: 0x00000000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Similar you can build U-Boot images from a 'ramdisk.image.gz' file
|
|
|
|
when your kernel is intended to use an initial ramdisk:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-> tools/mkimage -n 'Simple Ramdisk Image' \
|
|
|
|
> -A ppc -O linux -T ramdisk -C gzip \
|
|
|
|
> -d /LinuxPPC/images/SIMPLE-ramdisk.image.gz examples/simple-initrd
|
|
|
|
Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image
|
|
|
|
Created: Wed Jan 12 14:01:50 2000
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553.25 kB = 0.54 MB
|
|
|
|
Load Address: 0x00000000
|
|
|
|
Entry Point: 0x00000000
|
|
|
|
|
2013-12-01 19:43:11 +00:00
|
|
|
The "dumpimage" is a tool to disassemble images built by mkimage. Its "-i"
|
|
|
|
option performs the converse operation of the mkimage's second form (the "-d"
|
|
|
|
option). Given an image built by mkimage, the dumpimage extracts a "data file"
|
|
|
|
from the image:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
tools/dumpimage -i image -p position data_file
|
|
|
|
-i ==> extract from the 'image' a specific 'data_file', \
|
|
|
|
indexed by 'position'
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Installing a Linux Image:
|
|
|
|
-------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To downloading a U-Boot image over the serial (console) interface,
|
|
|
|
you must convert the image to S-Record format:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
objcopy -I binary -O srec examples/image examples/image.srec
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 'objcopy' does not understand the information in the U-Boot
|
|
|
|
image header, so the resulting S-Record file will be relative to
|
|
|
|
address 0x00000000. To load it to a given address, you need to
|
|
|
|
specify the target address as 'offset' parameter with the 'loads'
|
|
|
|
command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example: install the image to address 0x40100000 (which on the
|
|
|
|
TQM8xxL is in the first Flash bank):
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> erase 40100000 401FFFFF
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.......... done
|
|
|
|
Erased 8 sectors
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> loads 40100000
|
|
|
|
## Ready for S-Record download ...
|
|
|
|
~>examples/image.srec
|
|
|
|
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ...
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
15989 15990 15991 15992
|
|
|
|
[file transfer complete]
|
|
|
|
[connected]
|
|
|
|
## Start Addr = 0x00000000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can check the success of the download using the 'iminfo' command;
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
this includes a checksum verification so you can be sure no data
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
corruption happened:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> imi 40100000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
## Checking Image at 40100000 ...
|
|
|
|
Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB
|
|
|
|
Load Address: 00000000
|
|
|
|
Entry Point: 0000000c
|
|
|
|
Verifying Checksum ... OK
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Boot Linux:
|
|
|
|
-----------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The "bootm" command is used to boot an application that is stored in
|
|
|
|
memory (RAM or Flash). In case of a Linux kernel image, the contents
|
|
|
|
of the "bootargs" environment variable is passed to the kernel as
|
|
|
|
parameters. You can check and modify this variable using the
|
|
|
|
"printenv" and "setenv" commands:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> printenv bootargs
|
|
|
|
bootargs=root=/dev/ram
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> setenv bootargs root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> printenv bootargs
|
|
|
|
bootargs=root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> bootm 40020000
|
|
|
|
## Booting Linux kernel at 40020000 ...
|
|
|
|
Image Name: 2.2.13 for NFS on TQM850L
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 381681 Bytes = 372 kB = 0 MB
|
|
|
|
Load Address: 00000000
|
|
|
|
Entry Point: 0000000c
|
|
|
|
Verifying Checksum ... OK
|
|
|
|
Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK
|
|
|
|
Linux version 2.2.13 (wd@denx.local.net) (gcc version 2.95.2 19991024 (release)) #1 Wed Jul 19 02:35:17 MEST 2000
|
|
|
|
Boot arguments: root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2
|
|
|
|
time_init: decrementer frequency = 187500000/60
|
|
|
|
Calibrating delay loop... 49.77 BogoMIPS
|
|
|
|
Memory: 15208k available (700k kernel code, 444k data, 32k init) [c0000000,c1000000]
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
If you want to boot a Linux kernel with initial RAM disk, you pass
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
the memory addresses of both the kernel and the initrd image (PPBCOOT
|
|
|
|
format!) to the "bootm" command:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> imi 40100000 40200000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
## Checking Image at 40100000 ...
|
|
|
|
Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB
|
|
|
|
Load Address: 00000000
|
|
|
|
Entry Point: 0000000c
|
|
|
|
Verifying Checksum ... OK
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
## Checking Image at 40200000 ...
|
|
|
|
Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553 kB = 0 MB
|
|
|
|
Load Address: 00000000
|
|
|
|
Entry Point: 00000000
|
|
|
|
Verifying Checksum ... OK
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> bootm 40100000 40200000
|
|
|
|
## Booting Linux kernel at 40100000 ...
|
|
|
|
Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB
|
|
|
|
Load Address: 00000000
|
|
|
|
Entry Point: 0000000c
|
|
|
|
Verifying Checksum ... OK
|
|
|
|
Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK
|
|
|
|
## Loading RAMDisk Image at 40200000 ...
|
|
|
|
Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553 kB = 0 MB
|
|
|
|
Load Address: 00000000
|
|
|
|
Entry Point: 00000000
|
|
|
|
Verifying Checksum ... OK
|
|
|
|
Loading Ramdisk ... OK
|
|
|
|
Linux version 2.2.13 (wd@denx.local.net) (gcc version 2.95.2 19991024 (release)) #1 Wed Jul 19 02:32:08 MEST 2000
|
|
|
|
Boot arguments: root=/dev/ram
|
|
|
|
time_init: decrementer frequency = 187500000/60
|
|
|
|
Calibrating delay loop... 49.77 BogoMIPS
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
RAMDISK: Compressed image found at block 0
|
|
|
|
VFS: Mounted root (ext2 filesystem).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
bash#
|
|
|
|
|
2006-06-28 15:41:37 +00:00
|
|
|
Boot Linux and pass a flat device tree:
|
|
|
|
-----------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
First, U-Boot must be compiled with the appropriate defines. See the section
|
|
|
|
titled "Linux Kernel Interface" above for a more in depth explanation. The
|
|
|
|
following is an example of how to start a kernel and pass an updated
|
|
|
|
flat device tree:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> print oftaddr
|
|
|
|
oftaddr=0x300000
|
|
|
|
=> print oft
|
|
|
|
oft=oftrees/mpc8540ads.dtb
|
|
|
|
=> tftp $oftaddr $oft
|
|
|
|
Speed: 1000, full duplex
|
|
|
|
Using TSEC0 device
|
|
|
|
TFTP from server 192.168.1.1; our IP address is 192.168.1.101
|
|
|
|
Filename 'oftrees/mpc8540ads.dtb'.
|
|
|
|
Load address: 0x300000
|
|
|
|
Loading: #
|
|
|
|
done
|
|
|
|
Bytes transferred = 4106 (100a hex)
|
|
|
|
=> tftp $loadaddr $bootfile
|
|
|
|
Speed: 1000, full duplex
|
|
|
|
Using TSEC0 device
|
|
|
|
TFTP from server 192.168.1.1; our IP address is 192.168.1.2
|
|
|
|
Filename 'uImage'.
|
|
|
|
Load address: 0x200000
|
|
|
|
Loading:############
|
|
|
|
done
|
|
|
|
Bytes transferred = 1029407 (fb51f hex)
|
|
|
|
=> print loadaddr
|
|
|
|
loadaddr=200000
|
|
|
|
=> print oftaddr
|
|
|
|
oftaddr=0x300000
|
|
|
|
=> bootm $loadaddr - $oftaddr
|
|
|
|
## Booting image at 00200000 ...
|
2006-11-27 14:32:42 +00:00
|
|
|
Image Name: Linux-2.6.17-dirty
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 1029343 Bytes = 1005.2 kB
|
2006-06-28 15:41:37 +00:00
|
|
|
Load Address: 00000000
|
2006-11-27 14:32:42 +00:00
|
|
|
Entry Point: 00000000
|
2006-06-28 15:41:37 +00:00
|
|
|
Verifying Checksum ... OK
|
|
|
|
Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK
|
|
|
|
Booting using flat device tree at 0x300000
|
|
|
|
Using MPC85xx ADS machine description
|
|
|
|
Memory CAM mapping: CAM0=256Mb, CAM1=256Mb, CAM2=0Mb residual: 0Mb
|
|
|
|
[snip]
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
More About U-Boot Image Types:
|
|
|
|
------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
U-Boot supports the following image types:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
"Standalone Programs" are directly runnable in the environment
|
|
|
|
provided by U-Boot; it is expected that (if they behave
|
|
|
|
well) you can continue to work in U-Boot after return from
|
|
|
|
the Standalone Program.
|
|
|
|
"OS Kernel Images" are usually images of some Embedded OS which
|
|
|
|
will take over control completely. Usually these programs
|
|
|
|
will install their own set of exception handlers, device
|
|
|
|
drivers, set up the MMU, etc. - this means, that you cannot
|
|
|
|
expect to re-enter U-Boot except by resetting the CPU.
|
|
|
|
"RAMDisk Images" are more or less just data blocks, and their
|
|
|
|
parameters (address, size) are passed to an OS kernel that is
|
|
|
|
being started.
|
|
|
|
"Multi-File Images" contain several images, typically an OS
|
|
|
|
(Linux) kernel image and one or more data images like
|
|
|
|
RAMDisks. This construct is useful for instance when you want
|
|
|
|
to boot over the network using BOOTP etc., where the boot
|
|
|
|
server provides just a single image file, but you want to get
|
|
|
|
for instance an OS kernel and a RAMDisk image.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
"Multi-File Images" start with a list of image sizes, each
|
|
|
|
image size (in bytes) specified by an "uint32_t" in network
|
|
|
|
byte order. This list is terminated by an "(uint32_t)0".
|
|
|
|
Immediately after the terminating 0 follow the images, one by
|
|
|
|
one, all aligned on "uint32_t" boundaries (size rounded up to
|
|
|
|
a multiple of 4 bytes).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
"Firmware Images" are binary images containing firmware (like
|
|
|
|
U-Boot or FPGA images) which usually will be programmed to
|
|
|
|
flash memory.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
"Script files" are command sequences that will be executed by
|
|
|
|
U-Boot's command interpreter; this feature is especially
|
|
|
|
useful when you configure U-Boot to use a real shell (hush)
|
|
|
|
as command interpreter.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-03-14 21:52:45 +00:00
|
|
|
Booting the Linux zImage:
|
|
|
|
-------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
On some platforms, it's possible to boot Linux zImage. This is done
|
|
|
|
using the "bootz" command. The syntax of "bootz" command is the same
|
|
|
|
as the syntax of "bootm" command.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-05-16 15:40:11 +00:00
|
|
|
Note, defining the CONFIG_SUPPORT_RAW_INITRD allows user to supply
|
2012-03-18 11:47:58 +00:00
|
|
|
kernel with raw initrd images. The syntax is slightly different, the
|
|
|
|
address of the initrd must be augmented by it's size, in the following
|
|
|
|
format: "<initrd addres>:<initrd size>".
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Standalone HOWTO:
|
|
|
|
=================
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
One of the features of U-Boot is that you can dynamically load and
|
|
|
|
run "standalone" applications, which can use some resources of
|
|
|
|
U-Boot like console I/O functions or interrupt services.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Two simple examples are included with the sources:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
"Hello World" Demo:
|
|
|
|
-------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
'examples/hello_world.c' contains a small "Hello World" Demo
|
|
|
|
application; it is automatically compiled when you build U-Boot.
|
|
|
|
It's configured to run at address 0x00040004, so you can play with it
|
|
|
|
like that:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> loads
|
|
|
|
## Ready for S-Record download ...
|
|
|
|
~>examples/hello_world.srec
|
|
|
|
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ...
|
|
|
|
[file transfer complete]
|
|
|
|
[connected]
|
|
|
|
## Start Addr = 0x00040004
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> go 40004 Hello World! This is a test.
|
|
|
|
## Starting application at 0x00040004 ...
|
|
|
|
Hello World
|
|
|
|
argc = 7
|
|
|
|
argv[0] = "40004"
|
|
|
|
argv[1] = "Hello"
|
|
|
|
argv[2] = "World!"
|
|
|
|
argv[3] = "This"
|
|
|
|
argv[4] = "is"
|
|
|
|
argv[5] = "a"
|
|
|
|
argv[6] = "test."
|
|
|
|
argv[7] = "<NULL>"
|
|
|
|
Hit any key to exit ...
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
## Application terminated, rc = 0x0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Another example, which demonstrates how to register a CPM interrupt
|
|
|
|
handler with the U-Boot code, can be found in 'examples/timer.c'.
|
|
|
|
Here, a CPM timer is set up to generate an interrupt every second.
|
|
|
|
The interrupt service routine is trivial, just printing a '.'
|
|
|
|
character, but this is just a demo program. The application can be
|
|
|
|
controlled by the following keys:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
? - print current values og the CPM Timer registers
|
|
|
|
b - enable interrupts and start timer
|
|
|
|
e - stop timer and disable interrupts
|
|
|
|
q - quit application
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> loads
|
|
|
|
## Ready for S-Record download ...
|
|
|
|
~>examples/timer.srec
|
|
|
|
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ...
|
|
|
|
[file transfer complete]
|
|
|
|
[connected]
|
|
|
|
## Start Addr = 0x00040004
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> go 40004
|
|
|
|
## Starting application at 0x00040004 ...
|
|
|
|
TIMERS=0xfff00980
|
|
|
|
Using timer 1
|
|
|
|
tgcr @ 0xfff00980, tmr @ 0xfff00990, trr @ 0xfff00994, tcr @ 0xfff00998, tcn @ 0xfff0099c, ter @ 0xfff009b0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Hit 'b':
|
|
|
|
[q, b, e, ?] Set interval 1000000 us
|
|
|
|
Enabling timer
|
|
|
|
Hit '?':
|
|
|
|
[q, b, e, ?] ........
|
|
|
|
tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0xef6, ter=0x0
|
|
|
|
Hit '?':
|
|
|
|
[q, b, e, ?] .
|
|
|
|
tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x2ad4, ter=0x0
|
|
|
|
Hit '?':
|
|
|
|
[q, b, e, ?] .
|
|
|
|
tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x1efc, ter=0x0
|
|
|
|
Hit '?':
|
|
|
|
[q, b, e, ?] .
|
|
|
|
tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x169d, ter=0x0
|
|
|
|
Hit 'e':
|
|
|
|
[q, b, e, ?] ...Stopping timer
|
|
|
|
Hit 'q':
|
|
|
|
[q, b, e, ?] ## Application terminated, rc = 0x0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Minicom warning:
|
|
|
|
================
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Over time, many people have reported problems when trying to use the
|
|
|
|
"minicom" terminal emulation program for serial download. I (wd)
|
|
|
|
consider minicom to be broken, and recommend not to use it. Under
|
|
|
|
Unix, I recommend to use C-Kermit for general purpose use (and
|
|
|
|
especially for kermit binary protocol download ("loadb" command), and
|
2012-10-01 05:11:56 +00:00
|
|
|
use "cu" for S-Record download ("loads" command). See
|
|
|
|
http://www.denx.de/wiki/view/DULG/SystemSetup#Section_4.3.
|
|
|
|
for help with kermit.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Nevertheless, if you absolutely want to use it try adding this
|
|
|
|
configuration to your "File transfer protocols" section:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Name Program Name U/D FullScr IO-Red. Multi
|
|
|
|
X kermit /usr/bin/kermit -i -l %l -s Y U Y N N
|
|
|
|
Y kermit /usr/bin/kermit -i -l %l -r N D Y N N
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NetBSD Notes:
|
|
|
|
=============
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Starting at version 0.9.2, U-Boot supports NetBSD both as host
|
|
|
|
(build U-Boot) and target system (boots NetBSD/mpc8xx).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Building requires a cross environment; it is known to work on
|
|
|
|
NetBSD/i386 with the cross-powerpc-netbsd-1.3 package (you will also
|
|
|
|
need gmake since the Makefiles are not compatible with BSD make).
|
|
|
|
Note that the cross-powerpc package does not install include files;
|
|
|
|
attempting to build U-Boot will fail because <machine/ansi.h> is
|
|
|
|
missing. This file has to be installed and patched manually:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# cd /usr/pkg/cross/powerpc-netbsd/include
|
|
|
|
# mkdir powerpc
|
|
|
|
# ln -s powerpc machine
|
|
|
|
# cp /usr/src/sys/arch/powerpc/include/ansi.h powerpc/ansi.h
|
|
|
|
# ${EDIT} powerpc/ansi.h ## must remove __va_list, _BSD_VA_LIST
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Native builds *don't* work due to incompatibilities between native
|
|
|
|
and U-Boot include files.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Booting assumes that (the first part of) the image booted is a
|
|
|
|
stage-2 loader which in turn loads and then invokes the kernel
|
|
|
|
proper. Loader sources will eventually appear in the NetBSD source
|
|
|
|
tree (probably in sys/arc/mpc8xx/stand/u-boot_stage2/); in the
|
2005-04-13 10:02:42 +00:00
|
|
|
meantime, see ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/ppcboot_stage2.tar.gz
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Implementation Internals:
|
|
|
|
=========================
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following is not intended to be a complete description of every
|
|
|
|
implementation detail. However, it should help to understand the
|
|
|
|
inner workings of U-Boot and make it easier to port it to custom
|
|
|
|
hardware.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Initial Stack, Global Data:
|
|
|
|
---------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The implementation of U-Boot is complicated by the fact that U-Boot
|
|
|
|
starts running out of ROM (flash memory), usually without access to
|
|
|
|
system RAM (because the memory controller is not initialized yet).
|
|
|
|
This means that we don't have writable Data or BSS segments, and BSS
|
|
|
|
is not initialized as zero. To be able to get a C environment working
|
|
|
|
at all, we have to allocate at least a minimal stack. Implementation
|
|
|
|
options for this are defined and restricted by the CPU used: Some CPU
|
|
|
|
models provide on-chip memory (like the IMMR area on MPC8xx and
|
|
|
|
MPC826x processors), on others (parts of) the data cache can be
|
|
|
|
locked as (mis-) used as memory, etc.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
Chris Hallinan posted a good summary of these issues to the
|
2008-12-30 21:56:11 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot mailing list:
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Subject: RE: [U-Boot-Users] RE: More On Memory Bank x (nothingness)?
|
|
|
|
From: "Chris Hallinan" <clh@net1plus.com>
|
|
|
|
Date: Mon, 10 Feb 2003 16:43:46 -0500 (22:43 MET)
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Correct me if I'm wrong, folks, but the way I understand it
|
|
|
|
is this: Using DCACHE as initial RAM for Stack, etc, does not
|
|
|
|
require any physical RAM backing up the cache. The cleverness
|
|
|
|
is that the cache is being used as a temporary supply of
|
|
|
|
necessary storage before the SDRAM controller is setup. It's
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
beyond the scope of this list to explain the details, but you
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
can see how this works by studying the cache architecture and
|
|
|
|
operation in the architecture and processor-specific manuals.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OCM is On Chip Memory, which I believe the 405GP has 4K. It
|
|
|
|
is another option for the system designer to use as an
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
initial stack/RAM area prior to SDRAM being available. Either
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
option should work for you. Using CS 4 should be fine if your
|
|
|
|
board designers haven't used it for something that would
|
|
|
|
cause you grief during the initial boot! It is frequently not
|
|
|
|
used.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR should be somewhere that won't interfere
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
with your processor/board/system design. The default value
|
|
|
|
you will find in any recent u-boot distribution in
|
2005-08-01 14:49:12 +00:00
|
|
|
walnut.h should work for you. I'd set it to a value larger
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
than your SDRAM module. If you have a 64MB SDRAM module, set
|
|
|
|
it above 400_0000. Just make sure your board has no resources
|
|
|
|
that are supposed to respond to that address! That code in
|
|
|
|
start.S has been around a while and should work as is when
|
|
|
|
you get the config right.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-Chris Hallinan
|
|
|
|
DS4.COM, Inc.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is essential to remember this, since it has some impact on the C
|
|
|
|
code for the initialization procedures:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Initialized global data (data segment) is read-only. Do not attempt
|
|
|
|
to write it.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
* Do not use any uninitialized global data (or implicitely initialized
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
as zero data - BSS segment) at all - this is undefined, initiali-
|
|
|
|
zation is performed later (when relocating to RAM).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Stack space is very limited. Avoid big data buffers or things like
|
|
|
|
that.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Having only the stack as writable memory limits means we cannot use
|
|
|
|
normal global data to share information beween the code. But it
|
|
|
|
turned out that the implementation of U-Boot can be greatly
|
|
|
|
simplified by making a global data structure (gd_t) available to all
|
|
|
|
functions. We could pass a pointer to this data as argument to _all_
|
|
|
|
functions, but this would bloat the code. Instead we use a feature of
|
|
|
|
the GCC compiler (Global Register Variables) to share the data: we
|
|
|
|
place a pointer (gd) to the global data into a register which we
|
|
|
|
reserve for this purpose.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When choosing a register for such a purpose we are restricted by the
|
|
|
|
relevant (E)ABI specifications for the current architecture, and by
|
|
|
|
GCC's implementation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For PowerPC, the following registers have specific use:
|
|
|
|
R1: stack pointer
|
2008-02-14 21:43:22 +00:00
|
|
|
R2: reserved for system use
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
R3-R4: parameter passing and return values
|
|
|
|
R5-R10: parameter passing
|
|
|
|
R13: small data area pointer
|
|
|
|
R30: GOT pointer
|
|
|
|
R31: frame pointer
|
|
|
|
|
2010-01-19 13:41:58 +00:00
|
|
|
(U-Boot also uses R12 as internal GOT pointer. r12
|
|
|
|
is a volatile register so r12 needs to be reset when
|
|
|
|
going back and forth between asm and C)
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-02-14 21:43:22 +00:00
|
|
|
==> U-Boot will use R2 to hold a pointer to the global data
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: on PPC, we could use a static initializer (since the
|
|
|
|
address of the global data structure is known at compile time),
|
|
|
|
but it turned out that reserving a register results in somewhat
|
|
|
|
smaller code - although the code savings are not that big (on
|
|
|
|
average for all boards 752 bytes for the whole U-Boot image,
|
|
|
|
624 text + 127 data).
|
|
|
|
|
2009-08-17 15:23:02 +00:00
|
|
|
On Blackfin, the normal C ABI (except for P3) is followed as documented here:
|
2008-02-05 00:26:54 +00:00
|
|
|
http://docs.blackfin.uclinux.org/doku.php?id=application_binary_interface
|
|
|
|
|
2009-08-17 15:23:02 +00:00
|
|
|
==> U-Boot will use P3 to hold a pointer to the global data
|
2008-02-05 00:26:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
On ARM, the following registers are used:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
R0: function argument word/integer result
|
|
|
|
R1-R3: function argument word
|
2013-09-21 12:04:42 +00:00
|
|
|
R9: platform specific
|
|
|
|
R10: stack limit (used only if stack checking is enabled)
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
R11: argument (frame) pointer
|
|
|
|
R12: temporary workspace
|
|
|
|
R13: stack pointer
|
|
|
|
R14: link register
|
|
|
|
R15: program counter
|
|
|
|
|
2013-09-21 12:04:42 +00:00
|
|
|
==> U-Boot will use R9 to hold a pointer to the global data
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: on ARM, only R_ARM_RELATIVE relocations are supported.
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2010-05-21 03:08:03 +00:00
|
|
|
On Nios II, the ABI is documented here:
|
|
|
|
http://www.altera.com/literature/hb/nios2/n2cpu_nii51016.pdf
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
==> U-Boot will use gp to hold a pointer to the global data
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: on Nios II, we give "-G0" option to gcc and don't use gp
|
|
|
|
to access small data sections, so gp is free.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-10-19 20:41:11 +00:00
|
|
|
On NDS32, the following registers are used:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
R0-R1: argument/return
|
|
|
|
R2-R5: argument
|
|
|
|
R15: temporary register for assembler
|
|
|
|
R16: trampoline register
|
|
|
|
R28: frame pointer (FP)
|
|
|
|
R29: global pointer (GP)
|
|
|
|
R30: link register (LP)
|
|
|
|
R31: stack pointer (SP)
|
|
|
|
PC: program counter (PC)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
==> U-Boot will use R10 to hold a pointer to the global data
|
|
|
|
|
2006-03-31 16:32:53 +00:00
|
|
|
NOTE: DECLARE_GLOBAL_DATA_PTR must be used with file-global scope,
|
|
|
|
or current versions of GCC may "optimize" the code too much.
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Memory Management:
|
|
|
|
------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
U-Boot runs in system state and uses physical addresses, i.e. the
|
|
|
|
MMU is not used either for address mapping nor for memory protection.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The available memory is mapped to fixed addresses using the memory
|
|
|
|
controller. In this process, a contiguous block is formed for each
|
|
|
|
memory type (Flash, SDRAM, SRAM), even when it consists of several
|
|
|
|
physical memory banks.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
U-Boot is installed in the first 128 kB of the first Flash bank (on
|
|
|
|
TQM8xxL modules this is the range 0x40000000 ... 0x4001FFFF). After
|
|
|
|
booting and sizing and initializing DRAM, the code relocates itself
|
|
|
|
to the upper end of DRAM. Immediately below the U-Boot code some
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
memory is reserved for use by malloc() [see CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
configuration setting]. Below that, a structure with global Board
|
|
|
|
Info data is placed, followed by the stack (growing downward).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Additionally, some exception handler code is copied to the low 8 kB
|
|
|
|
of DRAM (0x00000000 ... 0x00001FFF).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
So a typical memory configuration with 16 MB of DRAM could look like
|
|
|
|
this:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0x0000 0000 Exception Vector code
|
|
|
|
:
|
|
|
|
0x0000 1FFF
|
|
|
|
0x0000 2000 Free for Application Use
|
|
|
|
:
|
|
|
|
:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
:
|
|
|
|
:
|
|
|
|
0x00FB FF20 Monitor Stack (Growing downward)
|
|
|
|
0x00FB FFAC Board Info Data and permanent copy of global data
|
|
|
|
0x00FC 0000 Malloc Arena
|
|
|
|
:
|
|
|
|
0x00FD FFFF
|
|
|
|
0x00FE 0000 RAM Copy of Monitor Code
|
|
|
|
... eventually: LCD or video framebuffer
|
|
|
|
... eventually: pRAM (Protected RAM - unchanged by reset)
|
|
|
|
0x00FF FFFF [End of RAM]
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
System Initialization:
|
|
|
|
----------------------
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
In the reset configuration, U-Boot starts at the reset entry point
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
(on most PowerPC systems at address 0x00000100). Because of the reset
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
configuration for CS0# this is a mirror of the onboard Flash memory.
|
|
|
|
To be able to re-map memory U-Boot then jumps to its link address.
|
|
|
|
To be able to implement the initialization code in C, a (small!)
|
|
|
|
initial stack is set up in the internal Dual Ported RAM (in case CPUs
|
|
|
|
which provide such a feature like MPC8xx or MPC8260), or in a locked
|
|
|
|
part of the data cache. After that, U-Boot initializes the CPU core,
|
|
|
|
the caches and the SIU.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Next, all (potentially) available memory banks are mapped using a
|
|
|
|
preliminary mapping. For example, we put them on 512 MB boundaries
|
|
|
|
(multiples of 0x20000000: SDRAM on 0x00000000 and 0x20000000, Flash
|
|
|
|
on 0x40000000 and 0x60000000, SRAM on 0x80000000). Then UPM A is
|
|
|
|
programmed for SDRAM access. Using the temporary configuration, a
|
|
|
|
simple memory test is run that determines the size of the SDRAM
|
|
|
|
banks.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When there is more than one SDRAM bank, and the banks are of
|
|
|
|
different size, the largest is mapped first. For equal size, the first
|
|
|
|
bank (CS2#) is mapped first. The first mapping is always for address
|
|
|
|
0x00000000, with any additional banks following immediately to create
|
|
|
|
contiguous memory starting from 0.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Then, the monitor installs itself at the upper end of the SDRAM area
|
|
|
|
and allocates memory for use by malloc() and for the global Board
|
|
|
|
Info data; also, the exception vector code is copied to the low RAM
|
|
|
|
pages, and the final stack is set up.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Only after this relocation will you have a "normal" C environment;
|
|
|
|
until that you are restricted in several ways, mostly because you are
|
|
|
|
running from ROM, and because the code will have to be relocated to a
|
|
|
|
new address in RAM.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
U-Boot Porting Guide:
|
|
|
|
----------------------
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
[Based on messages by Jerry Van Baren in the U-Boot-Users mailing
|
|
|
|
list, October 2002]
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2009-07-16 00:42:59 +00:00
|
|
|
int main(int argc, char *argv[])
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
sighandler_t no_more_time;
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2009-07-16 00:42:59 +00:00
|
|
|
signal(SIGALRM, no_more_time);
|
|
|
|
alarm(PROJECT_DEADLINE - toSec (3 * WEEK));
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
if (available_money > available_manpower) {
|
2009-07-16 00:42:59 +00:00
|
|
|
Pay consultant to port U-Boot;
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Download latest U-Boot source;
|
|
|
|
|
2008-12-30 21:56:11 +00:00
|
|
|
Subscribe to u-boot mailing list;
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2009-07-16 00:42:59 +00:00
|
|
|
if (clueless)
|
|
|
|
email("Hi, I am new to U-Boot, how do I get started?");
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
while (learning) {
|
|
|
|
Read the README file in the top level directory;
|
2009-07-16 00:42:59 +00:00
|
|
|
Read http://www.denx.de/twiki/bin/view/DULG/Manual;
|
|
|
|
Read applicable doc/*.README;
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Read the source, Luke;
|
2009-07-16 00:42:59 +00:00
|
|
|
/* find . -name "*.[chS]" | xargs grep -i <keyword> */
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
2009-07-16 00:42:59 +00:00
|
|
|
if (available_money > toLocalCurrency ($2500))
|
|
|
|
Buy a BDI3000;
|
|
|
|
else
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Add a lot of aggravation and time;
|
|
|
|
|
2009-07-16 00:42:59 +00:00
|
|
|
if (a similar board exists) { /* hopefully... */
|
|
|
|
cp -a board/<similar> board/<myboard>
|
|
|
|
cp include/configs/<similar>.h include/configs/<myboard>.h
|
|
|
|
} else {
|
|
|
|
Create your own board support subdirectory;
|
|
|
|
Create your own board include/configs/<myboard>.h file;
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
Edit new board/<myboard> files
|
|
|
|
Edit new include/configs/<myboard>.h
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
while (!accepted) {
|
|
|
|
while (!running) {
|
|
|
|
do {
|
|
|
|
Add / modify source code;
|
|
|
|
} until (compiles);
|
|
|
|
Debug;
|
|
|
|
if (clueless)
|
|
|
|
email("Hi, I am having problems...");
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
Send patch file to the U-Boot email list;
|
|
|
|
if (reasonable critiques)
|
|
|
|
Incorporate improvements from email list code review;
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
Defend code as written;
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
void no_more_time (int sig)
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
hire_a_guru();
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Coding Standards:
|
|
|
|
-----------------
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
All contributions to U-Boot should conform to the Linux kernel
|
2006-09-01 13:39:02 +00:00
|
|
|
coding style; see the file "Documentation/CodingStyle" and the script
|
2011-07-27 10:59:55 +00:00
|
|
|
"scripts/Lindent" in your Linux kernel source directory.
|
2006-09-01 13:39:02 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Source files originating from a different project (for example the
|
|
|
|
MTD subsystem) are generally exempt from these guidelines and are not
|
|
|
|
reformated to ease subsequent migration to newer versions of those
|
|
|
|
sources.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note that U-Boot is implemented in C (and to some small parts in
|
|
|
|
Assembler); no C++ is used, so please do not use C++ style comments (//)
|
|
|
|
in your code.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Please also stick to the following formatting rules:
|
|
|
|
- remove any trailing white space
|
2011-07-27 10:59:55 +00:00
|
|
|
- use TAB characters for indentation and vertical alignment, not spaces
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- make sure NOT to use DOS '\r\n' line feeds
|
2011-07-27 10:59:55 +00:00
|
|
|
- do not add more than 2 consecutive empty lines to source files
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- do not add trailing empty lines to source files
|
2004-01-04 16:28:35 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Submissions which do not conform to the standards may be returned
|
|
|
|
with a request to reformat the changes.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Submitting Patches:
|
|
|
|
-------------------
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Since the number of patches for U-Boot is growing, we need to
|
|
|
|
establish some rules. Submissions which do not conform to these rules
|
|
|
|
may be rejected, even when they contain important and valuable stuff.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-08-06 17:32:33 +00:00
|
|
|
Please see http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot/Patches for details.
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-12-30 21:56:11 +00:00
|
|
|
Patches shall be sent to the u-boot mailing list <u-boot@lists.denx.de>;
|
|
|
|
see http://lists.denx.de/mailman/listinfo/u-boot
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
When you send a patch, please include the following information with
|
|
|
|
it:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* For bug fixes: a description of the bug and how your patch fixes
|
|
|
|
this bug. Please try to include a way of demonstrating that the
|
|
|
|
patch actually fixes something.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* For new features: a description of the feature and your
|
|
|
|
implementation.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* A CHANGELOG entry as plaintext (separate from the patch)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* For major contributions, your entry to the CREDITS file
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2013-09-11 13:52:51 +00:00
|
|
|
* When you add support for a new board, don't forget to add a
|
|
|
|
maintainer e-mail address to the boards.cfg file, too.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* If your patch adds new configuration options, don't forget to
|
|
|
|
document these in the README file.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
* The patch itself. If you are using git (which is *strongly*
|
|
|
|
recommended) you can easily generate the patch using the
|
2011-07-27 10:59:55 +00:00
|
|
|
"git format-patch". If you then use "git send-email" to send it to
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
the U-Boot mailing list, you will avoid most of the common problems
|
|
|
|
with some other mail clients.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you cannot use git, use "diff -purN OLD NEW". If your version of
|
|
|
|
diff does not support these options, then get the latest version of
|
|
|
|
GNU diff.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
The current directory when running this command shall be the parent
|
|
|
|
directory of the U-Boot source tree (i. e. please make sure that
|
|
|
|
your patch includes sufficient directory information for the
|
|
|
|
affected files).
|
2003-07-15 07:45:49 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
We prefer patches as plain text. MIME attachments are discouraged,
|
|
|
|
and compressed attachments must not be used.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* If one logical set of modifications affects or creates several
|
|
|
|
files, all these changes shall be submitted in a SINGLE patch file.
|
2003-06-19 23:04:19 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* Changesets that contain different, unrelated modifications shall be
|
|
|
|
submitted as SEPARATE patches, one patch per changeset.
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-06-19 23:04:19 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Notes:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* Before sending the patch, run the MAKEALL script on your patched
|
|
|
|
source tree and make sure that no errors or warnings are reported
|
|
|
|
for any of the boards.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* Keep your modifications to the necessary minimum: A patch
|
|
|
|
containing several unrelated changes or arbitrary reformats will be
|
|
|
|
returned with a request to re-formatting / split it.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* If you modify existing code, make sure that your new code does not
|
|
|
|
add to the memory footprint of the code ;-) Small is beautiful!
|
|
|
|
When adding new features, these should compile conditionally only
|
|
|
|
(using #ifdef), and the resulting code with the new feature
|
|
|
|
disabled must not need more memory than the old code without your
|
|
|
|
modification.
|
2005-05-03 14:12:25 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-12-30 21:56:11 +00:00
|
|
|
* Remember that there is a size limit of 100 kB per message on the
|
|
|
|
u-boot mailing list. Bigger patches will be moderated. If they are
|
|
|
|
reasonable and not too big, they will be acknowledged. But patches
|
|
|
|
bigger than the size limit should be avoided.
|